Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 .
Document status: Standard Document version: 01.04 Document date: 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved. Sourced in Canada LEGAL NOTICE While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.
Contents New in this release 13 Other 13 Revision History 13 New circuit cards for CS 1000 Release 5 14 How to get help 15 Getting help from the Nortel web site 15 Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 15 Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 15 Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 16 Overview 17 Contents 17 Line cards 18 Trunk cards 44 Installation 46 Operation 47 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 55 Circuit card installation
Contents Option settings 81 Contents 81 Circuit card grid 82 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 83 NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 84 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC 89 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card 92 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 93 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 95 NT8D17 Conference/TDS card 96 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC 96 NT8D22 System Monitor 97 NT8D22 jumper settings 101 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card 104 QPC71 E and M/DX Signaling and Paging Trun
Contents 5 Physical description 161 Functional description 164 Front panel connector pin assignments 165 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 169 Contents 169 Introduction 169 Physical description 170 Functional description 176 Electrical specifications 185 Installation and configuration 188 Clocking Requirement 223 Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable 223 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 225 Applications 256 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 263 Contents 263 Int
Contents Introduction 363 Applications 363 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 365 Contents 365 Introduction 365 MFC signaling 365 MFE signaling 367 Sender and receiver mode 368 Physical specifications 370 NT6D70 SILC Line card 373 Contents 373 Introduction 373 Physical description 375 Functional description 375 NT6D71 UILC line card 383 Contents 383 Introduction 383 Physical description 384 Functional description 384 NT6D80 MSDL card 389 Contents 389 Introduction 389 Physical description 390 Functional desc
Contents 7 Installing the Data Access card 479 Port configuration 481 Cabling 482 Backplane pinout and signaling 487 Configuring the Data Access card 490 Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC 494 Upgrading systems 494 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 499 Contents 499 Introduction 499 Physical description 501 Functional description 506 Electrical specifications 519 Digital line interface specifications 519 Connector pin assignments 524 Configuration 527 NT8D03 Analog Line card Overview 533 533 NT8
Contents Connector pin assignments 776 Configuration 784 Applications 795 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 801 Contents 801 Introduction 801 Physical description 802 Functional description 803 Connector pin assignments 805 Configuring the SDI paddle board 805 Applications 809 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 821 Contents 821 Introduction 821 Physical description 822 Functional description 822 Connector pin assignments 824 Configuring the QSDI paddle board 825 Applications
Contents 9 Physical description 909 Functional description 910 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 923 Contents 923 Introduction 923 Physical description 924 Functional description 932 Architecture 933 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard 953 Contents 953 Introduction 953 Physical description 955 Functional description 956 NTBK22 MISP card 961 Contents 961 Introduction 961 Physical description 961 Functional description 962 NTBK50 2.
Contents Introduction 1017 Memory 1019 100BaseT IP daughterboards 1020 PC card interface 1023 Security device 1023 SDI ports 1024 Conferencing 1025 Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card 1025 1029 Contents 1029 Introduction 1029 Processor 1032 Ethernet ports 1032 External connections 1032 Internal connections 1032 Expansion daughterboards 1032 Backplane interface 1032 Serial data interface ports 1033 TTY default settings 1033 MGC serial port co
Contents 11 Init 1043 DIP switch 1043 LED indicators 1043 Status LED 1043 Active CPU LED 1043 Ethernet LEDs 1044 Removable and fixed media drive LEDs 1044 NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards 1045 Contents 1045 Introduction 1045 Media Gateway Controller card 1045 Daughterboard configurations 1047 NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card 1049 Contents 1049 Introduction 1049 Ethernet ports 1050 External connections 1050 Internal connections 1050 Backplane interfaces 1050 Serial data interfac
Contents Functional description 1091 Connector pin assignments 1095 Configuring the ESDI card 1097 Applications 1101 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 1103 Contents 1103 Introduction 1103 Physical description 1104 Functional description 1105 Connector pin assignments 1107 Configuring the QSDI card 1109 Applications 1113 The TDS/DTR card 1117 Contents 1117 Introduction 1117 Features 1117 Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents 1129 Introduction 1129 Operation 1129 Frame structure 1
New in this release This technical document provides information about circuit cards for the CS 1000 Release 5.5. Non-supported circuit cards have been deleted from the document. Other Revision History June 2008 Standard 01.04. This document has been up-issued to include information in the "Jumper and switch settings" (page 528) section. February 2008 Standard 01.03. This document has been up-issued to reflect changes in technical content for CR Q01396373-01. December 2007 Standard 02.05.
New in this release • Multi-purpose Serial Data Link: Description (553-3001-195) • Circuit Cards: Installation and Testing (553-3001-211) • Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100) (Content from Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100) also appears in Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals (NN43001-567) • Circuit Card Reference (553-3023-211) New circuit cards for CS 1000 Release 5 CS 1000 5.
How to get help This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services. Getting help from the Nortel web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support web site: www.nortel.com/support This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products.
How to get help Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Overview Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Line cards" (page 18) "Installation" (page 19) "Operation" (page 21) "Analog line interface units" (page 26) "Digital line interface units" (page 28) "Analog line call operation" (page 30) "Digital line call operation" (page 34) "Lineside T1 and E1 call operation" (page 34) "Voice frequency audio level" (page 42) "Off-premise line protection" (page 43) "Line protectors" (page 43) "Line protection grounding" (page 44) "Line and
Overview Line cards The following line cards are designed using the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) architecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 1 "Line card characteristics" (page 18) lists the line card characteristics.
Line cards 19 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface card The NT5D11/14 Lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to T1-compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. The T1-compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Norstar.
Overview Figure 1 IPE line cards shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module When installing line cards, follow these general procedures: Step Action 1 Configure the jumpers and switches on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. 2 Install the line card into the selected slot. 3 Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Line cards 21 Once these steps are complete, the terminal equipment is ready for use. Operation This section describes how line cards fit into the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the busses that carry signals to and from the line cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. These differences are summarized in Table 2 "IPE module architecture" (page 21). Host interface bus Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller.
Overview • ringing signal on/off • message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link.
Line cards 23 Figure 2 Typical IPE analog line card architecture DS-30X loops The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form and route it to the Call Server over DS-30X network loops.
Overview IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal as 512 kHz Time Compressed Multiplexed (TCM) data. The digital line card converts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop and transmits it in the next available timeslot. When a word is received from the DS-30X loop, the digital line card converts it to the TCM format and transmits it to the digital phone terminal over the digital line facility.
Line cards 25 Figure 3 DS-30X loop data format DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). They function in a manner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit block diagram" (page 29). A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128 channels (120 usable timeslots).
Overview In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In its reply, the slave informs the controller if any change in card status has taken place. The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information.
Line cards 27 Figure 4 Typical analog line interface unit block diagram Coder/Decoder circuit The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm. On some analog line cards, the decoding algorithm depends of the type of CODEC installed when the board is built.
Overview amplifies the result. On some of the line cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed by the system controller. This allows the system to make up for line losses according to the loss plan. Balancing network Depending on the card type, the balancing network provides a 600 3/4, 900 3 /4, 3COM or 3CM2 impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground).
Line cards 29 The digital line interface card contains one or more digital line interface units. See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit block diagram" (page 29). Each digital line interface unit contains a Digital Line Interface Circuit (DLIC). The purpose of each DLIC is to demultiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into integrated voice and data bitstreams and transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the TCM loop.
Overview Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length when using 24 gauge wire. The circuit allows for a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms. Signaling The digital line interface units also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, monitor, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls.
Line cards 31 Figure 6 Call connection sequence - near-end station receiving call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Overview Figure 7 Call connection sequence - near-end originating call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Line cards 33 Message waiting Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive notification that a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that drive a message waiting light, the light is turned on by connecting the ring side of the telephone line to the –150 V dc power supply. When the line card senses that the telephone has gone off-hook, it removes the –150 V dc voltage until the telephone goes back on-hook.
Overview is programmed in LD10, and ranges from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to a maximum of 2.55 seconds. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for more information. Digital line call operation Digital line call operation is controlled entirely by use of messages between the digital telephone and the system. These messages are carried across the TCM loop interface. There is no call connection sequence similar to the one used for analog telephone line operation.
Line cards 35 Figure 8 Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Overview Figure 9 Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence Call operation is described by categorizing the operation into the following main states: • Idle (on-hook) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Line cards 37 • Incoming calls • Outgoing calls • Calls disconnected by the CO • Calls disconnected by the telephone Loop Start Mode In Loop Start mode, the A and B bits meaning is: • Transmit from LTI:A bit = 0 (tip ground on); B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) • Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed); B bit = 1 (no ring ground) When a T1 channel is idle, the Lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the tip lead and –48Vdc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting its transmit A
Overview depends upon the setting that was configured using the SAL. If the terminal equipment is capable of detecting distant end disconnect, it responds by changing the Lineside T1 card’s receive A bit to 0 (open loop).The call is now terminated and the interface is in the idle (on-hook) state.
Line cards 39 Transmit Receive State A B A B • Idle 0 1 0 1 • Ringing is applied from Lineside T1 card 0 1/0 0 1 • Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0 1/0 1 1 • Lineside T1 card stops ringing 0 1 1 1 Outgoing Calls: • Idle 0 1 0 1 • Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0 1 1 1 Call Disconnect from far end: • Steady state (call in progress) 0 1 1 1 • Far end disconnects by dropping loop current and Lineside T1 card changes Transmit A bit to 1 momentarily.
Overview the transmit B bit between 0 and 1 (0 during ring on, 1 during ring off), and ground on the tip lead by setting the transmit A bit to 0. When an incoming call is answered (by the terminal equipment going off-hook), the terminal equipment simulates tripping the ringing and shutting off ringing by causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change from 0 to 1. The Lineside T1 card responds to this message by simulating loop closure by holding the transmit B bit constant at 1.
Line cards 41 Call disconnect from Lineside T1 terminal equipment Alternatively, while a call is in process, the terminal equipment may disconnect by going on-hook, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change to 0. The Lineside T1 card responds to this message by simulating the removal of ground from the tip by changing its transmit A bit to 1. The call is now terminated and the interface is once again in the idle condition.
Overview Lineside T1 card has operational limitations compared to typical ground start interface equipment relating to start of dialing, distant end disconnect and glare potential. Distant end disconnect restrictions If the SAL feature is not available in the CS 1000 software, the Lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) when a call is terminated by the distant end.
Line cards 43 Off-premise line protection Off-premise applications are installations where the telephone lines are extended outside the building where the PBX system is housed, but the lines are not connected to public access facilities. This application is commonly referred to as a "campus installation." In off-premise applications, special protection devices and grounding are required to protect PBX and telephone components from any abnormal conditions, such as lightning strikes and power line crosses.
Overview Device order code Analog Line Digital Line 6AP 6DP ESP-200 ESP-050 Manufacturer Oneac Corporation 27944 North Bradley Road Libertyville, IL 60048-9700 (800) 553-7166 or (800) 327-8801 x555 EDCO Inc. of Florida 1805 N.E. 19th Avenue P.O. Box 1778 Ocala, FL 34478 (904) 732-3029 or (800) 648-4076 These devices are compatible with 66 type M1-50 split blocks or equivalent. Consult the device manufacturer if more specific compatibility information is required.
Trunk cards 45 Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use Table 6 "Trunk card characteristics" (page 45) to select the trunk card that meets system needs.
Overview • 4-wire E and M Trunks with: — Type I or Type II signaling — Duplex (DX) signaling • Paging (PAG) trunks The trunk type and function can be configured on a per port basis. Dialing outpulsing is provided on the card. Make and break ratios are defined in software and downloaded by software commands. NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card The NTCK16 generic central office trunk cards support up to eight analog central office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot that supports IPE.
Operation 47 Figure 10 IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module 3 Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). 5 Connect the trunk card output to the selected terminal equipment at the MDF. 6 Configure the individual trunk interface unit using the Trunk Administration program (LD 14) and the Trunk Route Administration program (LD 16).
Overview Host interface bus Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller. The IPE microcontroller is used for the following: • to perform local diagnostics (self-test) • to configure the card according to instructions issued by the system processor • to report back to the system processor information such as card identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed configuration status.
Operation 49 Figure 11 Typical IPE trunk card architecture The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line.
Overview Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link.
Operation 51 clock frequency supplied by the controller card). The timeslot repetition rate for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization. Signaling data is transmitted to and from the line cards using the call signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When the line card detects a condition that the switch needs to know about, it creates a 24-bit signaling word.
Overview LAN link. This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 "Typical IPE trunk card architecture" (page 49)). The output bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card.The input bus is used by the controller for input of trunk card status data. Figure 13 Network connections to IPE modules A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module (or IPE section of a CE module).
Operation 53 other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slave at a time. In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status.
Overview Figure 14 Typical trunk interface unit block diagram Coder/Decoder circuit The coder/decoder (codec) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm. On some trunk cards the decoding algorithm depends of the type of codec installed when the board is built.
Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 55 Balancing network Depending on the card type, the balancing network is capable of providing either a 600 ohm or a 900 ohm (or both) impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground). The balancing network is a transformer/analog (hybrid) circuit combination. Signaling circuits Signaling circuits are relays that place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk.
Overview Compatible System Options Card Ports Port types QPC841 4 QPC513 2 51C, 61C 81C RS-232-C asynchronous X X RS-232-C synchronous or high-speed synchronous* X X *See the section on the QPC513 card in this manual for details on the high-speed interface The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board does not use a front panel. It mounts to the rear of the backplane in the NT5D21 Core/Network module, and does not consume a module slot.
Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 57 — Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode • enable/disable switch and LED • input/output (I/O) device address selectable by on-board switches.
Overview Table 10 Environmental specifications Specification Operation Storage Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C; (32 to 122 F) –55 to +70 C; (–58 to 158 F) Relative humidity (non-condensing) 5% to 95% 0% to 95% Altitude 3500m; (11000 ft) 15000m; (50000 ft) Electrostatic discharge The SDI cards meet the requirements of the IEC 801-2, clause 8.0 procedure. They can withstand a direct discharge of ±5 to ±20 kV without being damaged.
Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 59 Maintenance The following maintenance programs are used to maintain individual SDI asynchronous ports. The program used depends on the application of the port. • LD 37 Input/Output Diagnostics – Used for system terminal, printer, background terminal ports, and system monitor status. • LD 42 Call Detail Recording (CDR) Diagnostic – For checking CDR links and CDR system terminals. The following maintenance program is used to maintain individual SDI synchronous ports.
Overview Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Circuit card installation Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Card slots - Large System" (page 61) "Circuit and installation" (page 62) "Precautions" (page 64) "Installing a circuit card" (page 66) Card slots - Large System The following table in this chapter identifies card slot compatibility in the following modules: • NT4N41 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M SG, CS 1000M MG, Meridian 1 PBX 61C Call Processor (CP) PII, CP PIV, and Meridian 1 PBX 81C • NT4N4
Circuit card installation Circuit and installation Table 11 Large System card slots Component Large System A0786611 Call Processor Pentium II® card 81C Core/Net: "CP" A0810486 Call Processor Pentium II 81C Core/Net: "CP" NT1P61 Fiber Superloop Network card Core/Net: 0–7 NT1P62 Fiber Peripheral Controller card IPE: "Contr" NT1R52 Remote Carrier Interface IPE: "Contr" NT1R20 Off-Premise Station IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT4D18 Hybrid Bus Terminator Core/Net: between 11 and 12 NT4D19 and NT
Circuit and installation 63 Component Large System NT5K36 Direct Inward/Direct Outward Dial Trunk IPE: any slot but "Contr" card NT5K70 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K71 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K72 E and M Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K82 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K83 E and M Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K84 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5K90 Central Office Tr
Circuit card installation Component Large System NT9D19 Call Processor card 61C Core/Net: 15 and 16 NTAG03 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NTAG04 Central Office/Direct Inward Dial Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NTAG36 Nortel Integrated Recorded Announcer IPE: any slot but "Contr" NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel daughterboard Connects to DDP card NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NTCK43AA Primary Rate Interface card Core/Net: 0-7 Net
Precautions 65 WARNING Module covers are not hinged; do not let go of the covers. Lift covers away from the module and set them out of your work area. WARNING Circuit cards may contain a lithium battery. There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not replace components on any circuit card; you must replace the entire card. Dispose of circuit cards according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Circuit card installation Figure 15 Static discharge points During repair and maintenance procedures do the following: • Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a module power supply before the power supply is removed or inserted. • In AC-powered systems, capacitors in the power supply must discharge. Wait five full minutes between turning off the circuit breaker and removing the power supply from the module. • Software disable cards, if applicable, before they are removed or inserted.
Installing a circuit card 67 DANGER To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, read all of the guidelines in "Circuit and installation" (page 62) before you begin installation and follow all guidelines throughout the procedure. Procedure 2 Installing a circuit card Step Action 1 Open the protective carton and remove the circuit card from the antistatic bag. Return the antistatic bag to the carton and store it for future use.
Circuit card installation Figure 16 Installing the circuit card in the card cage 7 Insert the card into the card aligning guides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel resistance. The tip of the locking device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 16 "Installing the circuit card in the card cage" (page 68)). 8 Lock the card into position by simultaneously pushing the ends of the locking devices against the faceplate.
Installing a circuit card 69 Note: An initialization causes a momentary interruption in call processing. 11 If you are installing the card in a working system, refer to the work order and the technical document, Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to add the required office data to the system memory. 12 Go to the appropriate test procedure in "Acceptance tests" (page 71). —End— Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
Circuit card installation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Acceptance tests Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 71) "Conference cards" (page 71) "Digitone receiver cards" (page 74) "Line cards" (page 75) "Multifrequency sender cards" (page 75) "Multifrequency signaling cards" (page 76) "Network cards" (page 77) "Trunk cards" (page 77) "Tone and digit switch cards" (page 79) Introduction Test procedures for most circuit cards require that internal and external cabling be installed.
Acceptance tests 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Request the status of a loop on the conference card: LD 38 STAT loop Conference status is formatted as follows: CNFC n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of conference groups disabled and busy CHAN n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of channels disabled and busy UNEQ card is not equipped in the system DSBL card is disabled in software 3 If the conference card loop is disabled, enable it.
Conference cards 73 CNFC MAN loop c Where "c" is the manual conference group (1-15) A manual conference test is performed by stepping through conference channels and groups, listening for noise that indicates a faulty card. The manual conference test can be performed through a system terminal or BCS maintenance telephone. If commands are entered from a maintenance telephone, this telephone automatically becomes part of the manual conference call. Only one manual conference call is allowed at one time.
Acceptance tests —End— Digitone receiver cards Note: The DTR daughterboard connected to a QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card cannot be assigned when the IPE shelf is used in single loop mode. Procedure 4 Testing digitone receiver cards Step Action Use this procedure to test a Digitone receiver (DTR) card, a DTR daughterboard, or the DTR function on the NT8D18 Network/DTR card.
Multifrequency sender cards 75 Line cards Procedure 5 Testing line cards Step Action Use this procedure to test a line card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on a specific loop and shelf: LD 30 SHLF l sloop and shelf numbers If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages.
Acceptance tests 2 Test and enable an MFS loop: LD 46 MFS loop (on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, the TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair) Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware for the card.
Trunk cards 77 LD 54 ATST l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 3 End the session in LD 54: **** —End— Network cards Procedure 8 Testing network cards Step Action Use this procedure to test a network card.
Acceptance tests Procedure 9 Testing a trunk card using a maintenance telephone Step Action 1 Access the system from a maintenance telephone. See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in the Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone.
Tone and digit switch cards 79 **** 5 Test an automatically identified outward dialing (AIOD) trunk card: LD 41 AIOD l s c loop, shelf, and card numbers If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages.
Acceptance tests If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 5 End the session in LD 34: **** 6 Using a maintenance telephone, log into the system. See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in the Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details on accessing the system using a maintenance telephone.
Option settings Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Circuit card grid" (page 82) "NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card" (page 83) Table 14 "General purpose switch settings" (page 85) "NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC" (page 89) "NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane" (page 91) "NT6D68 Core module backplane" (page 92) "NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card" (page 92) "NT8D14 Universal Trunk card" (page 93) "NT8D15 E and M Trunk card" (page 95) "NT8D17 Conference/TDS
Option settings "QPC414 Network card" (page 105) "QPC441 3-Port Extender cards" (page 106) "QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards" (page 108) "QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards" (page 109) "QPC471 Clock Controller card" (page 110) "QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card" (page 111) "QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card" (page 111) "QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card" (page 113) "QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards" (page 114) "QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards" (page 114) "QPC720 Primary Rate
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 83 Figure 17 Circuit card grid NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card Table 13 "OPS analog line card configuration" (page 83) lists option settings for the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analog card. Table 13 OPS analog line card configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Loop resistance (ohms) 0–460 0–2300 (Note 2) Jumper strap setting (Note 6) Both JX.0 and JX.1 off Both JX.0 and JX.
Option settings Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) ONP OPX Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.
NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 85 General purpose switches Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Table 14 "General purpose switch settings" (page 85)). Table 14 General purpose switch settings Switch 1 Description SW9/SW15 switch setting Framing Mode off - ESF on - SF 2 Yellow Alarm Method off - FDL on - Digit2 3 Zero Code Suppression Mode off - B8ZS on - AMI 4 Unused off Trunk interface switches A switch provides selection of T1 transmission.
Option settings A set of four DIP switches provides selection among three values for receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trunk 1 (see Table 17 "Trunk interface impedance switch settings" (page 86)).
NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card Table 19 DCH mode and address select switch settings Swit ch Description S3 Switch Setting 1-4 D-Channel daughterboard Address See the next table.
Option settings Illustrations of switch locations and settings Figure 18 "Switch functions and areas" (page 88) displays functional areas for switches on the NT5D12 DDP card. Figure 18 Switch functions and areas Figure 19 "Switch default settings" (page 89) displays default settings for switches on the NT5D12 DDP card. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Figure 19 Switch default settings NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Table 21 "NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British Telecom" (page 90) through Table 26 "NT6D42CC SW2" (page 91) list option settings for the NT6D42 Ringing Generator. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Option settings Table 21 NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British Telecom Application Ringing frequency Ringing voltage Jumper locations Ringing output North America 20 Hz 86 V ac P5 Low impedance High voltage message waiting British Telecom 25 Hz 80 V ac P4 Low impedance No high voltage message waiting Table 22 NT6D42 jumper locations P4 and P5 High voltage message waiting Pin location Disable Jumper in P4 Enable Jumper in P5 Note: One jumper must be installed.
NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane 91 Table 25 NT6D42CB SW2 SW2 Ringing voltage Message waiting voltage 1 2 3 4 86 V ac –120 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –120 V dc on off off off 80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on 75 V ac –120 V dc off on off off 75 V ac –150 V dc off on off on 70 V ac –120 V dc off off on off 70 V ac –150 V dc off off on on Table 26 NT6D42CC SW2 SW2 Ringing voltage Message waiting voltage 1
Option settings NT6D68 Core module backplane Table 28 NT6D68 Core module backplane Jumper Location (between slots) Core 1 Core 0 Note: Berg jumpers are located along the bottom of the primary side of the backplane. (This is inside the card cage assembly.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 93 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 30 "NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings" (page 93) through Table 34 "NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss" (page 95) list option settings for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.
Option settings Table 32 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings-extended range Jumper strap settings Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X CO/FX/WATS > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 34 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5 1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5 2225 m (7300 ft) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7 3566 m (11700 ft) 379 607 977 3.7 4.8 6.0 5639 m (18500 ft) 600 960 1544 5.9 7.6 9.
Option settings NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conference attenuation PAD levels. These PAD levels are used if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connector on the faceplate is reserved for future use. You can enable or disable a warning tone for conference calls. When the option is enabled, the tone lets callers know they are entering a conference call. The switch for this option is preset to disable the warning tone.
NT8D22 System Monitor 97 Settings Frequency Amplitude P1 P2 P3 25 Hz 86 V ac open 2–5 8–11 open 50 Hz 70 V ac 1–4 7–10 open open 50 Hz 80 V ac 3–6 9–12 open open NT8D22 System Monitor The master system monitor, located in the column with CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63. For examples of system monitor option settings in basic configurations, see "Sample settings for NT8D22 System Monitors.
Option settings Position SW1 function 1 2 3 4 5 6 Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only) Not used Not used 7 8 on on off off on off on off 7 8 off on off Not used Not used Not used Meridian 1 columns only Table 37 NT8D22 SW2 Position SW2 indication 1 Master system monitor Slave system monitor on off 2 3 4 5 6 on Always off Not used All other operation For master, indicates total number of slaves Configure 3–8 according to the Table 39 "NT8D22 settings for total number of s
NT8D22 System Monitor 99 Table 39 NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves-SW2 on master Switch position How many slave units 3 4 5 6 7 0 on on on on 1 on on on 2 on on 3 on 4 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 on on 32 off on on on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off on on off on 34 off on on on off on on on on off off 35 off on on on off off on on on off on on 36 off on on off on on 5 on on on off on off 37 off on on off on
Option settings Switch position How many slave units 3 4 5 6 7 30 on off off off 31 on off off off Switch position 8 How many slave units 3 4 5 6 7 8 off on 62 off off off off off on off off 63 off off off off off off Table 40 NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave address-SW2 on slave Position Slave unit address 3 4 5 6 7 1 on on on on 2 on on on 3 on on 4 on 5 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 on off 33 off on on on on off on off on 34 off on on
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Position Slave unit address 3 4 5 6 7 27 on off off on 28 on off off 29 on off 30 on 31 32 101 Position 8 Slave unit address 3 4 5 6 7 8 off off 59 off off off on off off off on on 60 off off off off on on off off on off 61 off off off off on off off off off off on 62 off off off off off on on off off off off off 63 off off off off off off off on on on on on NT8D22 j
Option settings Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The configurations for both switches are shown in Table 42 "QSDI paddle board address switch settings" (page 102). To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically.
NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card 103 Table 43 QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings Port 1 - SW 3 Port 1 -SW 2 Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off Port 3 — SW 7 Port 3— SW 6 DTE (termina
Option settings Figure 20 NT8D72 DIP switch settings QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card Options (minimum vintage N) Plug location NT5D21 Core/Network module F13 NT8D35 Network module Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
QPC414 Network card 105 QPC71 E and M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards Unit 0 E35 switch Unit 1 E5 switch Applicati on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E and M off off off on off off on off off off off on off off on off Paging off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off DX 2-wir e (condu ctor loop < 2.5 K 3 /4) on on off off off on off on on on off off off on off on DX 2-wir e (condu ctor loop > 2.
Option settings S1 and S2—E33 Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage A (for different styles/series). These cards can only be used in the option A setting: J3—H5 or E11 J4—H17 or E7 S1 and S2—E33 Note: Connectors and loop relations: Even loop: J1 faceplate connector, jumper at J4 or S1 Odd loop: J2 faceplate connector, jumper at J3 or S2 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards For CS 1000M SG and MG systems, QPC441 vintage F or later must be used in all modules.
QPC441 3-Port Extender cards 107 Table 45 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A".
Option settings 0 1 0 on on on on 1 on on off on 2 on off on on 3 on off off on 4 off on on on 5 off on off on 6 off off on on 7 off off off on 0 on on on off 1 on on off off 2 on off on off 3 on off off off 4 off on on off 5 off on off off 6 off off on off 7 off off off off QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards Table 47 "QPC559, QPC560 single density" (page 108) and Table 48 "QPC559, QPC560 double density" (page 109)
QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards 109 Table 48 QPC559, QPC560 double density Double density—Unit 0/1/2/3 H17/H3/A17/A3 switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 loop pulsing off off off off off off battery and ground pulsing off off off off on off on off on off on off Application Outgoing ANI only: Other than outgoing ANI Jumpers (QPC560) Units 0/1/2/3 600 3/4 resistive impedance connect pins 1 and 2 3-component complex impedance connect pins 2 and 3 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards Table 49 "QPC528 Tru
Option settings Unit 0 jumper (Location E27) Unit 1 jumper (Location E11) Unit 2 jumper (Location D29) Unit 3 jumper (Location D9) Unit 0 Jumper Unit 1 Jumper Unit 2 Jumper Unit 3 Jumper 600 3/4 resistive impedance Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 3-component complex impedance Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Jumper: QPC471 Clock Controller card Table 50 "QPC471 vintage H" (page 110) lists option settings for the QPC471 Clock Controller card.
QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card 111 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card Switches at E29/E9/A29/A11 Units 0/1/2/3 3 4 5 6 7 Application 1 2 8 Zero ohm outpulsing on off off Standard outpulsing off on off Ground start on on off Loop start off off off Loop start, automatic guard detection off on off PPM daughterboard not installed on off PPM daughterboard installed off off Battery on M operation off on off Ground on M operation on off off Second pair M
Option settings Table 52 QPC550 vintage A-600/900 Ohm impedance selection Switch number Device location Device designation Unit number Impedance (ohms) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 G29(a) S3.
QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card 113 Table 55 QPC550 vintage B-software control for 2dB pad 2 dB pad control H/W Device location Device designation Unit number Switch number (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1.0/1 1 1 on off 2 off off 3 off off 4 on off 1 on off 2 off off 3 off off 4 on off 0 F1 3 S1.2/3 2 QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card S1 (F33) Signal duration on the 18-pair faceplate Binary value (.
Option settings disabled off 6 off on on off 14 off on on on 7 on on on off 15 on on on on *When enabled, this switch prevents a signal from being sent from a paging unit until 5 seconds elapsed time since the beginning of the previous signal on that same unit.
QPC775 Clock Controller card 115 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Table 56 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Switch S2 settings To repeater facility To cross-connect point 5 on 0–45 m (0–150 ft) 0–30 m (0–100 ft) 2, 4, 6 on 46–135 m (151–450 ft) 31–100 m (101–355 ft) 1, 3, 7 on 136–225 m (451–750 ft) 101–200 m (356–655 ft) Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF SW3-1 on = extended superframe format (ESF) off = superframe format (SF) Note: All positions on S2 (location B22) are OFF except as sho
Option settings Table 58 QPC775 vintage E switch settings SW1 System SW2 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CS 1000M SG on on on on off off off off off on * * CS 1000M MG on off off off off off off off ** on * * 0–4.3 m (0–14 ft) off off 4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft) off on 6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft) on off 10.4–15.2 m (34–50 ft) on on *Cable length between the J3 faceplate connectors: *If there is only one Clock Controller card in the system, set to OFF.
QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Device number 117 SW14 Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 off off off off off off off on 14 15 off off off off off off off off Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF. Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never show identical settings. Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON.
Option settings Table 61 QPC841 DTE or DCE selection Mode Port 1—SW8 Port 1—SW9 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on off off on off off on off off off on on Port 2—SW6 Port 2—SW7 DTE on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on off off on off
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 119) "Physical description" (page 121) "Functional description" (page 124) "Electrical specifications" (page 135) "Operation" (page 138) "Connector pin assignments" (page 142) "Configuring the OPS analog line card" (page 144) "Application" (page 147) Introduction The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card design
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • hookflash • battery reversal Each unit is independently configured by software control in the Analog (500/2500 type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. You can install this card in any IPE slot. The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card provides eight full duplex analog telephone line interfaces. Each interface provides the external line connection with secondary hazard and surge (lightning) protection.
Physical description 121 Physical description The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The OPS analog line card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. A 25-pair amphenol connector below the card is cabled to the cross connect terminal (also called the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)).
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Self Test The faceplate of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card is equipped with a red LED. When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is completed successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software; then the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains weakly lit, replace the card.
Physical description 123 Figure 21 OPS analog line card - faceplate The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Functional description This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card’s control, signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description of how the card itself functions. See Figure 22 "OPS analog line card block diagram" (page 124).
Functional description 125 Figure 22 "OPS analog line card - block diagram" (page 124) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the OPS analog line card. Each of these functions are described on the following pages. Card interfaces The OPS analog line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. See "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 48) for more details.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card The OPS analog line card uses only eight of the 30 available timeslots for its eight line interfaces. The OPS analog line card can be configured in software to format PCM data in the µ-law or A-law conventions. Maintenance communication Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between line or trunk cards and the CPU. Maintenance data is transported through the card LAN link.
Functional description 127 The card LAN link supports the following functions on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card: • polling • reporting of self-test status • CPU initiated card reset • reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) • reporting of firmware version • reporting of line interface unit configuration • enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy • reporting of card status Power interface Power is provided to the NT1R20 OPS analog line card by the NTAK78 ac/dc or NT
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) conversion of analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four interface units and contains switchable pads for control of transmission loss on a per unit basis.
Functional description 129 • standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohm or 3COM1 or 3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis • loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic purposes The OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a Card LAN link, and signaling and control circuits on the OPS analog line card. MicrocontrollerThe NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
Functional description 131 — transmission loss levels Microcontroller—The microcontroller controls the following: • reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link: — card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number) — firmware version — self-test status — programmed configuration status • receipt and implementation of card configuration: — of the codecs — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of line inter
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Card LAN interface Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card LAN link is described in the section "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 21). The NT1R20 OPS analog line card has the capability of providing an interrupted dial tone to indicate that a message is waiting or that call forwarding is enabled.
Functional description 133 LD 10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively. The message waiting interrupted dial tone and call forward reminder tone features are enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively. See Software Input/Output Reference — Maintenance (NN43001-711) for LD 10 service change instructions. Individual line interface units on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card are configured to either OPS (for OPS application) or On-premises Station (ONS) (for ONS application) Class of Service (CLS) in the Single-line Telephone Administration program LD 10.
Electrical specifications Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable length 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 135 Cable loop resistance (ohms) 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 1411 m (4600 ft) 2.5 2 1.6 385.6 240.3 150 1694 m (5600 ft) 3 2.4 1.9 462.8 288.3 180 2541 m (8300 ft) 4.5 3.7 2.8 694.2 432.5 270 8469 m (27800 ft) 15 12.2 9.4 2313.9 1441.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Signaling and control – This portion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system CPU to operate line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop. Circuit power The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to +5 V dc for use by the digital logic circuits.
Electrical specifications 137 Power requirements Table 65 "OPS analog line card - power requirements" (page 137) shows the maximum power consumed by the card from each system power supply. Table 65 OPS analog line card - power requirements Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) ±15.0 V dc ± 5% 150 mA +8.5 V dc ± 2% 200 mA +5.0 V dc ± 5% 100 mA –48.0 V dc ± 5% 350 mA The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to +5 V dc for use by the digital logic circuits.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Table 66 OPS analog line card - ringer limitations ONS Loop Range Maximum Number of Ringers (REN) 0–10 ohms 3 > 10–460 ohms 2 0 – 10 ohms 3 > 10 – 900 ohms 2 > 900 – 2300 ohms 1 The OPS line card supports up to three NE-C4A (3 REN) ringers on each line for either ONS or OPS applications. See Table 66 "OPS analog line card - ringer limitations" (page 138).
Operation 139 The operation of each unit is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages. When the OPS analog line card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and – 48 V dc on the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line interface unit on the card.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end State Two-way voice connection Remarks The system detects increase in loop current, tips ringing, and put call through to near-end station. Near end station hangs up first High-resistance loop If near end station hangs-up first, the line card detects the drop in loop current. Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop Line card unit is ready for the next call.
Operation 141 Table 69 Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call State Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end Remarks Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop No battery current drawn. Call request Low resistance loop Near-end station goes off-hook. Battery current is drawn, causing detection of off-hook state. Dial Tone Dial tone is applied to the near end station from the system.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads towards the OPS analog line card (see Table 69 "Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call" (page 141)).
Connector pin assignments 143 The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for more detailed I/O panel connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair. Configuring the OPS analog line card The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.
Configuring the OPS analog line card 145 Note 3: Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire. Note 4: The following are the default software impedance settings: Termination Impedance (TIMP): Balanced Impedance (BIMP): ONP CLS 600 ohms 600 ohms OPX CLS 600 ohms 3CM2 Note 1: Gain treatment, such as a Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Figure 24 OPS analog line card - jumper block locations Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See Table 71 "OPS analog line card - configuration" (page 144). For units connected to loops of 460 to 2300 ohms, both jumper blocks must be installed. For loops that are 460 ohms or less, jumper blocks are not installed.
Application 147 Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length between the near-end (Meridian 1) and the far-end station must be known. To assist in determining loop length, Table 63 "OPS analog line card - cable loop resistance and loss" (page 134) shows some typical resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements. Set the jumpers on the NT1R20 OPS card.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card battery and ringing. Facilities are generally provided by the local exchange carrier (OPS pairs are usually in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 25 "Traditional OPS application configuration" (page 149). Note: OPS service should not be confused with Off-Premise EXtension (OPX) service.
Application 149 Figure 25 Traditional OPS application configuration Note 1: OPS service should not be confused with off-premise extension (OPS) service. OPS service is the provision of an extension to a main subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX. Additionally, OPS as used to denote off-premise extension service should not be confused with the OPS class-of-service assigned in the Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD10).
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Other applications The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional configuration shown in Figure 25 "Traditional OPS application configuration" (page 149). Examples of such applications are: • a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
Application 151 • termination to other than a telephone set, such as to a fax machine • individual circuits on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card can also be configured as On-Premise Station (ONS) ports in LD 10: — ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection (not available on other analog line cards) — to use otherwise idle NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card ports The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications that are variants on
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • the transmission parameters of the facilities between the Meridian 1 OPS port and the off-premise station or termination • the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the termination These factors must be considered when planning applications using the OPS analog line card. They are important if considering configurations other than the traditional OPS application shown in Figure 25 "Traditional OPS application configuration" (page 149).
Application 153 When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is programmed into the OPS analog line card on a call-by-call basis. When configured for CLS ONS, an OPS analog line card port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls. The loss in the other port involved in the call can vary on a call-by-call basis to achieve the total loss scheduled by the plan.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 15.0 dB – 4.5 dB = 10.5 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range) (OPS service loss objective) (required gain treatment) The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended. Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other Meridian 1 ports in accordance with the Meridian 1 loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss for each call.
Application 155 If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15 dB, line treatment using a switched-gain Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR) extends the voice range. The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohm loop including telephone resistance). Signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; so gain treatment can be used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • The attenuation distortion (frequency response) of the OPS facility should be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200 Hz. • The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port should approximate that of 600 ohm cable. If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.
Application 157 regulatory requirements as well as industry standards, they are not designed to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting facilities. • Nortel Networks recommends that the attenuation distortion (frequency response) of the OPS facility be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200 Hz. • The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port be approximately that of 600 ohms cable.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card • the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding bridge • the OPS termination is to telephones behind a local switch providing local current feed, such as a fax machine or a key telephone system OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other applications can also impact transmission performance.
Application 159 A feature of many (though not all) standard telephones is that the loudness increases with decreased current. So as the line (Meridian 1 to OPS termination) facility gets longer and lossier, the increased loudness of the telephone somewhat compensates for the higher loss, assuming direct current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge.
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 161) "Physical description" (page 161) "Functional description" (page 164) "Front panel connector pin assignments" (page 165) Introduction The NT4N39AA Call Processor Pentium IV (CP PIV) Large System processor card was introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.5.
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two ejector/injector handles. A reset button and two double LED packages (four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well.
Physical description Figure 26 CP PIV card (front) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Figure 27 CP PIV card (side) Functional description The card employs an Intel Pentium Processor as the central processing unit. The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manufactured in 0.09 um process technology and provides 32 KB of on die data and instruction cache as well as 1 MB of on die L2 cache running at core clock frequency.
Front panel connector pin assignments 165 Memory CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM technology. The CP PIV provides a maximum of two GBytes using two verticall DIMM sockets to install off-the-shelf DIMM modules. CP PIV only supports DDR SDRAM DIMM memory with a supply voltage of +2.5V. are supportedThe memory data path is 72-bit wide. The Intel 855GME Host Bridge supports 64 Mbit, 128 MByte, 256 MByte and 512 Mbyte SDRAM technologies with a maximum ROW page size of 16 Kbytes and CAS latency of 2 or 2.5.
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Table 29. ITP CONNECTOR Pin Outs Table 73 USB connector pin outs Pin number Pin name 1 USB VCC 2 USB- 3 USB+ 4 USB GND 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports The physical interface for the two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to the front panel is through a stacked dual RJ 45 connector with magnetics and LEDs. The corresponding pin details are shown in Table 74 "Ethernet connector pin outs" (page 166).
Front panel connector pin assignments 167 LED Functionality Color Default LED3 Green CompactFlash activity -Off LED4 Green CompactFlash activity -Off ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only) Table 76 ITP connector pin outs Pin Pin Signal Name Signal Name P1 GND P2 GND P3 BPM0N P4 NC P5 BPM1N P6 RESETN P7 BPM2N P8 GND P9 BPM3N P10 TDI P11 BPM4N P12 TMS P13 BPM5N P14 TRSTN P15 ITP_CPURSTN P16 TCK P17 TCK P18 NC P19 CLK P20 GND P21 CLKN P22 PWR P23 BPM5N
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 169) "Physical description" (page 170) "Functional description" (page 176) "Electrical specifications" (page 185) "Installation and configuration" (page 188) "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page 104) "Applications" (page 256) Introduction This section describes the two Lineside T1 interface cards: • NT5D11 – applicable for Large Systems only • NT5D14 – applicable
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The Lineside T1 card can be installed in the system’s main cabinet or one of the expansion cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can be installed in the Cabinet system). The Lineside T1 card emulates an analog line card to the system software; therefore, each channel is independently configurable by software control in LD 10.
Physical description 171 The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard. The motherboard circuitry is contained on a standard 31.75 by 25.40 cm. (12.5 by 10.0 in) printed circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by 6.0 in) printed circuit board and mounts to the motherboard on six standoffs. The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Faceplate The faceplate of the card is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital line cards, and occupies two card slots. It comes equipped with four LED indicators. See Figure 29 "Lineside T1 card - faceplate" (page 175). Figure 28 Lineside T1 card faceplate In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 78 "NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs" (page 173). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.
Physical description 173 Table 78 NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs LED State Definition STATUS On (Red) The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn’t yet been configured in software. Off The card is in an active state. On (Red) A red alarm has been detected from the T1 link. (This includes, but is not limited to: not receiving a signal, the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds.) Off No red alarm exists.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards If one of these alarm conditions is detected, the red LED lights. Yellow alarm indication is sent to the far-end as long as the near-end remains in a red alarm condition. Depending on how the Man-Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED remains lit until the following actions occur: • If the "Self-Clearing" function has been enabled in the MMI, the LED clears the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is the factory default.
Physical description 175 The STATUS LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the LED flashes continuously, or remains weakly lit, replace the card.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Lineside T1 card slots are enabled. No LED operation is observed when the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the card, both card slots must be disabled. The LED does not turn on until both card slots are disabled. The RED ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected an alarm condition from the T1 link.
Functional description 177 Figure 30 Lineside T1 card - block diagram The NT5D14AA provides the following features and functions: • Card interfaces • T1 interface circuit • Signaling and control • Card control functions • Microcontroller • Card LAN interface • Sanity Timer • Man-Machine Interface (MMI) Figure 32 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 191) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the Lineside T1 card.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards the system. The terminal equipment is assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the switch. Usually, the Lineside T1 card eliminates the need for channel bank type equipment normally placed between the switch and the terminal equipment. This provides a more robust and reliable end-to-end connection.
Functional description 179 The Lineside T1 interface offers a number of benefits when used to connect to third-party applications equipment: • It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank equipment. • The Lineside T1 supports powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic capability. • Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the T1-compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the T1-compatible peripheral equipment is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives. The Lineside T1 card is compatible with all IPE based systems and standard public or private DSX-1 type carrier facilities. Using A/B robbed bit signaling, it supports D4 or ESF channel framing formats as well as AMI or B8ZS coding.
Functional description 181 T1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving Rx signaling bitstreams from the T1 link and transmitting Rx signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop. The line interface circuit performs the following: • Provides an industry standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 feet) interface. • Converts DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A and B robbed bit signaling protocol.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop. Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the Lineside T1 card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.
Functional description 183 The Lineside T1 card contains two microcontrollers that control the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards — programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation — maintenance diagnostics • interface with the line card circuit: — converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data stream, using robbed bit signaling. • the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.
Electrical specifications 185 Man-Machine Interface The Lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Characteristics Description Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit Distance to Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) or Channel Service Unit 0-199.6 meters (0–655 feet) Table 81 "Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics" (page 186) provides a technical summary of the T1 line interfaces, and Table 83 "Lineside T1 card - power required" (page 187) lists the maximum power consumed by the card.
Electrical specifications 187 The Lineside T1 card requires +15 V, –15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply ac or NT6D40 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply dc can supply power to a maximum of eight Lineside T1 cards. Table 83 Lineside T1 card - power required Voltage Current (max.) + 5.0 V dc 1.6 Amp +15.0 V dc 150 mA. –15.0 V dc 150 mA. The Lineside T1 card obtains its power from the Option 11C’s backplane.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 85 Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature-normal 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86 F), ambient Operating temperature-short term 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113 F), ambient Operating humidity-normal 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing) Operating humidity-short term 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature –50 to +70 C (–58 to 158 F), ambient Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Ta
Installation and configuration 189 5 Configure the Lineside T1 card through the system software and verify self-test results. 6 Verify initial T1 operation and configure MMI (optional). —End— Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page 104). Installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card consists of six basic steps: Step Action 1 Configure the dip switches on the Lineside T1 card for the environment.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings" (page 192) through Table 90 "Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)" (page 194). When the line-side T1 card is oriented as shown in Figure 32 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 191), the dip switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down.
Installation and configuration 191 Figure 32 Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations T1 framing The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment supports. T1 coding The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment using either AMI or B8ZS coding.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards DSX-1 length Estimate the distance between the Lineside T1 card and the hardwired local CPE, or the Telco demarc RJ48, for the carrier facility connecting the Lineside T1 and the remote CPE. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on this distance. Line supervision on T1 failure This setting determines in what state all 24 ports of the Lineside T1 card appears to the CS 1000M, CS 1000E and Meridian 1 in case of T1 failure.
Installation and configuration Dip Switch Number Characteristic Selection XPEC Address for the Lineside T1 card See Table 88 "Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 - 6)" (page 193) 7 Not Used Leave Off 8 Reserved for SL-100 use Leave Off 3–6 Table 88 Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 - 6) XPEC Address S1 Switch Position 3 S1 Switch Position 4 S1 Switch Position 5 S1 Switch Position 6 00 Off Off Off Off 01
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Dip Switch Number Characteristic Selection CPE or CSU distance See Table 90 "Lineside T1 card CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)" (page 194) 6 Line processing on T1 link failure On = On-hook Off = Off-hook 7 Daisy-chaining to MMI On = Yes Off = No 8 MMI Master or Slave On = Master Off = Slave 3–5 Table 90 Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5) Distance S2 Swit
Installation and configuration 195 Figure 33 Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations Line Supervisory Signaling protocol As described in "Power requirements" (page 323), the Lineside T1 card is capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line signaling the CPE equipment supports.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • The address of the shelf in which the card resides These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card firmware; however the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch. The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 – 15. 16 is the maximum number of Lineside T1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 Lineside T1 cards) capable of daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal.
Installation and configuration 197 MMI Master or Slave This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem. This setting determines whether this card is a master or a slave in the MMI daisy-chain. Select the master setting if this card is the card that is cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the slave setting if this card is cabled to another Lineside T1 card in a daisy chain.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards XPEC Address S1 Switch Position 3 S1 Switch Position 4 S1 Switch Position 5 S1 Switch Position 6 07 Off On On On 08 On Off Off Off 09 On Off Off On 10 On Off On Off 11 On Off On On 12 On On Off Off 13 On On Off On 14 On On On Off 15 On On On On Table 93 Lineside T1 card - T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings Dip Switch Number Characteristic Selection 1 T1 framing On = D4 Off = ESF 2 T1 Coding On = AM
Installation and configuration Distance S2 Switch Position 3 S2 Switch Position 4 S2 Switch Position 5 400–533 Off Off On 534–655 Off Off Off 199 Installation This section describes how to install and test the Lineside T1 card. When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 IPE module. When installing the Lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level module.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Module. When installing the Lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level module.
Installation and configuration 201 Vintage levels cabling 16 ports For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed into the following card slot pairs: Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard 0 and 1 1 and 2 4 and 5 7 and 8 8 and 9 9 and 10 12 and 13 13 and 14 The Lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs: Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard 2 and 3 3 and 4 6 and 7 10 and 11 11 and 12 14 and 15 If the Lineside T1
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard 0 and 1 1 and 2 4 and 5 7 and 8 8 and 9 9 and 10 12 and 13 13 and 14 The Lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs: Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard 2 and 3 3 and 4 6 and 7 10 and 11 11 and 12 14 and 15 If the Lineside T1 card must be installed into one of the restricted card slot pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an additional NT8D81 cable from t
Installation and configuration 203 The Lineside T1 card is cabled from its backplane connector through connections from the motherboard circuit card only (no cable connections are made from the daughterboard circuit card) to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the IPE module. The connections from the Lineside T1 card to the I/O panel are made with the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables provided with the IPE module.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Usually, the I/O panel is connected to the T1 link and other external devices through the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable. See Figure 36 "Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI" (page 211). This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel.
Installation and configuration Figure 34 Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 35 Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable 3 Turn over the T1 transmit and receive pairs, where required for hardwiring the Lineside T1 card to local CPE T1 terminal equipment. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Installation and configuration 207 —End— The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Table 97 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 207) shows the I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O panel only use 14 of the available 50-pins, the remaining pins are reserved and cannot be used for other signaling transmissions.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 98 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts" (page 208) shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable.
Installation and configuration 209 at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility. External alarm connections P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alarm hardware. Plug the male DB9 connector labeled "P3" into the external alarm.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Procedure 13 Connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal Step Action Follow this procedure for connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal: 1 Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem.
Installation and configuration 211 Figure 36 Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI To make the connections at the MDF, follow this procedure: Step Action 1 Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect tail starting with the first tip and ring pair of the Lineside T1 motherboard card slot on the cross-connect side of the MDF terminals.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Table 99 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 212) shows the I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O panel only use 14 of the available 50-pins, the remaining pins are reserved and cannot be used for other signaling transmissions.
Installation and configuration 213 Table 100 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts" (page 213) shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards T1 connections T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 as shown in Table 100 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts" (page 213). Plug the DB15 male connector labeled "P2" into the T1 link. T1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the Lineside T1 card and CPE equipment that is hardwired without carrier facilities.
Installation and configuration 215 The MMI (described in detail in "Functional description" (page 391)) monitors the T1 link for specified performance criteria and reports on problems detected. One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, the Lineside T1 card’s microprocessor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has classified as alarm levels 1 or 2.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the second card labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal). 3 Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards. 4 When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).
Installation and configuration 217 to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins labeled "control 1" are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 Lineside T1 cards, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, can be linked to one MMI terminal using the daisy chaining approach.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 38 Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI —End— Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the Lineside T1 card, the interface characteristics must be configured to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1 of Switch 1 • Character width – 8 bits • Parity bit – none • Stop bits – one • Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Nortel Communication Ser
Installation and configuration 219 For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the Lineside T1 card, the interface characteristics must be set to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1 of Switch 1 • Character width – 8 bits • Parity bit – none • Stop bits – one • Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Software configuration Although much of the architecture and many of the features of the Lineside T1 card differ from the analog line card, the
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Item TN T1 Channel Number Motherboard 5 6 Motherboard 6 7 Motherboard 7 8 Motherboard 8 9 Motherboard 9 10 Motherboard 10 11 Motherboard 11 12 Motherboard 12 13 Motherboard 13 14 Motherboard 14 15 Motherboard 15 16 Daughterboard 0 17 Daughterboard 1 18 Daughterboard 2 19 Daughterboard 3 20 Daughterboard 4 21 Daughterboard 5 22 Daughterboard 6 23 Daughterboard 7 24 Although much of the architecture
Installation and configuration 221 equipment through the switch software, the T1 channel number must be cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is shown in Table 102 "DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping" (page 221).
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards OSP and against FTR respond: ISP The Lineside T1 card treats OSP and ISP for both originating and terminating calls as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off disconnect. Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment. Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The Lineside T1 card does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision on originating calls.
Clocking Requirement 223 goes out. The LED goes out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is enabled by the software. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card. Clocking Requirement The clocking for NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card in CS1000 Rls 5.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 39 MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Step Action 1 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable to the AUI port of the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 40 "MG1000 chassis" (page 224) shows the AUI port of the MG1000 chassis. 2 In the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis, connect to 15-pin DSUB connector on the back panel formerly used for the 10Base-T AUI connection.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 225 Figure 41 Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis 3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5) • Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 • Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter. Figure 42 "Option 11C Cabinet" (page 225) shows the Option 11C Cabinet.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards This section describes the features of MMI and explains how to configure and use the MMI firmware.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 227 When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI does the following: • activates the external alarm hardware • lights the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or YELLOW ALARM) • displays an alarm message on the MMI terminal • creates entry in the alarm log When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI performs all of the same functions as alarm level 1, and in addition, forces the Lineside T
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI does the following: • activates the external alarm hardware • lights the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or YELLOW ALARM) • displays an alarm message on the MMI terminal • creates entry in the alarm log When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI performs all of the same functions as alarm level 1, and in addition, forces the Lineside T1
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 229 It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Descriptions of each of these performance error counters, and instructions on how to report on them and clear them can be found in "Performance counters and reporting" (page 248).
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards where the four-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions (dip switch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as opposed to the address set in the CS 1000 software), plus the two-digit address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies. For example, to login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type: L 13 4 A space is inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software • 231 LTI:ss cc> for multi-card installations, where ss represents the two-digit address, and cc represents the two-digit card slot address Basic commands MMI commands can now be executed. There are seven basic commands that can be combined together to form a total of 19 command sets. They are: • Alarm • Clear • Display • Set • Test • Help • Quit If ? is typed, the MMI lists the above commands along with an explanation of their usage.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Command Description A E Alarm Enable Enables all alarms. C A Clear Alarm Clears all alarms, terminates line processing, and resets the T1 bit error rate and frame slip counters. C A L C E D A [P] D C D H [P] D P Clear Alarm Log Clears the alarm log. Clear Error Clears the error counter for the T1. Display Alarms [Pause] Displays the alarm log – a list of the most recent 100 alarms along with time and date stamps.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 233 Description Command S A Set Alarm parameters Alarm parameters include the allowable bit errors per second threshold and alarm duration. S C Set Clearing Sets the alarm self-clearing function to either enable or disable. S D Set Date Sets date or verifies current date. S T Set time Sets time or verifies current time. T x Test Initiates the T1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in process, enter the STOP TEST (S) command at any time.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Notation Used: CAPS - Required Letters [ ] - Optional | - Either/Or Each of these commands can be executed by typing the first letter of the command or by typing the entire command. Command sets are entered by typing the first letter of the first command, a space, and the first letter of the second command or by typing the entire command.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 235 Command Description DP Display Performance Displays performance counters for the current hour. D S [P] Display Status [Pause] Displays carrier status, including whether the card is in the alarm state, and what alarm level is currently active. H or ? Help Displays the help screen L Login Logs into the MMI terminal when the system has one Lineside T1 card Q Quit Logs the terminal user out.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Alarm parameters The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the parameters by which an alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alarm activation levels: • Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below the AL1 setting. This is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated. • Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL1 setting but below AL2 setting.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 237 Alarm threshold bit errors per second in power of 10 Threshold to set alarm Allowable duration periods 10–7 1.5/10 seconds 10–3600 seconds 10–8 1.5/100 seconds 100–3600 seconds 10–9 1.5/1000 seconds 1000–3600 seconds The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm lasts.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards continues for the designated duration period. The alarm finally clears when the alarm condition is no longer detected for the designated duration period either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function configures parameters for detecting frame slip errors, by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 239 Set Clearing Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disable alarm self-clearing. Answer Y or N to the question: "Enable Self Clearing? (YES or NO)". If "Enable Self-Clearing" is chosen (the factory default condition), the system automatically clears alarms after the alarm condition is no longer detected for the corresponding duration period.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Alarm parameters The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the parameters by which an alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alarm activation levels: • Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below the AL1 setting. This is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated. • Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL1 setting but below AL2 setting.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 241 Alarm Threshold bit errors per second in Power of 10 Threshold to set alarm Allowable Duration Periods 10–7 1.5/10 seconds 10–3600 seconds 10–8 1.5/100 seconds 100–3600 seconds 10–9 1.5/1000 seconds 1000–3600 seconds The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm lasts.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards continues for the designated duration period. The alarm finally clears when the alarm condition is no longer detected for the designated duration period either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function sets parameters for detecting frame slip errors, by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 243 Set Clearing Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disable alarm self-clearing. Answer Y or N to the question: "Enable Self Clearing? (YES or NO)". If "Enable Self-Clearing" is chosen (the factory default condition), the system automatically clears alarms after the alarm condition is no longer detected for the corresponding duration period.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be found in "Configuring parameters" (page 235). Bit errors may activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm. An out of frame condition is declared if two out of four frame bits are in error. If this condition occurs, the hardware immediately attempts to reframe.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 245 alarm level 2 only). When this command set is typed in, the MMI displays the message "Alarm acknowledged." If the alarm condition still exists, the alarm is declared again. Display Alarms A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set into the MMI.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • Frame slip errors • Out of frame condition • Loss of signal condition • Blue alarm (AIS) condition Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be found in "Configuring parameters" (page 235). Bit errors may activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 247 Clear Alarm The Clear Alarm (C A) command set clears all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened), the LED light goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time when the alarm is cleared, and line processing ceases (for alarm level 2 only). When this command set is typed in, the MMIl displays the message "Alarm acknowledged.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Port 20 off hook, Port 21 on hook, Port 22 on hook, Port 23 on hook Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 link according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss of frame and frame slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts are accumulated for an hour, and then they are reset to 0.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software Seconds Seconds 2263 Seconds Seconds Counter 0 2263 249 Seconds 2263 352 321 Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. When these counters are reset to zero, the performance counter values are put into the history log. The error counter indicates the number of errors that occurred since the error counter was cleared.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • Unavailable seconds – unavailable state starts with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds). Severely errored seconds are defined as more than 320 CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of frames in a second.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software Ending Seconds 20:00 23 19.00 0 18.00 0 17.00 0 16.00 0 Seconds Seconds Counter 139 0 162 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Seconds Seconds 129 139 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 251 Use the pause command to display a full screen at a time by entering D H P. Clear Error Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command set.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards During a test, if an invalid word is received, a failure peg counter is incremented. The peg counter saturates at 65,000 counts. At the end of the test, the Test Results message indicates how many failures, if any, occurred during the test. Table 109 "MMI Tests" (page 252) shows which test to run for the associated equipment.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 253 Figure 44 MMI external loopback test Test 3, network loopback, loops the received T1 data back toward the CPE equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the T1 link or the CPE device could be defective. To isolate the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run in tandem.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Tests can be performed once (for 1 through 98 minutes), or continuously (selected by entering 99 minutes) until a "Stop Test" command is entered. Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of the time period or when a "Stop Test" command is issued. Only a "Stop Test" command stops a test with a duration selection of 99.
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 255 Figure 46 MMI Local loopback test Figure 47 MMI External loopback test Test 3, network loopback, loops the received T1 data back toward the CPE equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the T1 link or the CPE device could be defective.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Applications The Lineside T1 interface is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-compatible IPE and a system or off-premise extensions over long distances.
Applications 257 Figure 49 Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE The Lineside T1 card can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to remote locations (up to 500 miles from the system). In this application, the analog telephone functionality is extended over T1 facilities, providing a telephone at a remote site with access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone lines. See Figure 50 "Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application" (page 258).
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 50 Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application Similarly, the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 51 "Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system" (page 259). In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
Applications 259 Figure 51 Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system The Lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when determining the appropriateness of an application.The Lineside T1 interface is an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-compatible peripheral equipment and a Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 52 Lineside T1 interface connection to peripheral equipment For example, the Lineside T1 card can be used to connect the Meridian 1 to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Networks Open IVR system. In this way, the Meridian 1 can send a call to the VRU. Because the Lineside T1 card supports analog (500/2500-type) telephones, the VRU is able to send the call back to the Meridian 1 for further handling.
Applications 261 Figure 53 Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application Similarly, the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the Meridian 1 system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 54 "Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system" (page 262). In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 54 Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system Note: The Lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when determining the appropriateness of an application. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 263) "Physical description" (page 264) "Functional description" (page 268) "Electrical specifications" (page 272) "Installation and Configuration" (page 274) "Installation" (page 280) "Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software" (page 292) "Applications" (page 314) Introduction Two vintages of NT5D33 and NT5D34 cards are supported: • NT5D33AB/NT5D34AB – standard Li
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards • NT5D33AC/NT5D34AC – Enhanced Lineside E1 Interface (ELEI) cards The ELEI card is similar to an LEI card, but has been enhanced to allow the capability of transporting caller information using the proprietary signaling interface Channel Associated Signaling (CAS+). ELEI cards can operate in one of two modes: LEI mode, or enhanced (ELEI) mode. In LEI mode, this card is fully compatible with, and provides the same functionality as, the standard LEI card.
Physical description 265 Faceplate The LEI faceplate is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital line cards. It occupies two card slots. The LE1 faceplate has four LEDs. SeeFigure 43 "MMI local loopback test" (page 252) Figure 55 "NT5D33AB LEI card - faceplate" (page 265) (IPE version), and Figure 56 "NT5D34AB LEI card - faceplate" (page 266) (Cabinet system). Figure 55 NT5D33AB LEI card - faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 56 NT5D34AB LEI card - faceplate The LEDs give status indications on the operations as described in Table 111 "LEI card LED operation" (page 267). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Physical description 267 Table 111 LEI card LED operation LED Operation Status Line card Red alarm E1 near end Yellow alarm E1 far end Maint Maintenance The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and therefore, if it is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards information on E1 link maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition such as not receiving a signal, or the signal exceeds bit-error thresholds or frame-slip thresholds, a yellow alarm signal is sent to the LEI, if the terminal equipment supports this feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, the LED turns on.
Functional description 269 Overview The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1-compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turrets, etc.) and the system. In this application, the terminal equipment can be assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones. The LEI supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start protocols.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards signaling bitstreams onto the E1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving receive signaling bitstreams from the E1 link and transmitting receive signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.
Functional description 271 — maintenance diagnostics • interface with the line card circuit — converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the E1 data stream, using channel associated signaling. • the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 58 CAS+ compliance Key Benefits of using CAS+ signaling (ELEI mode) over traditional A/B bit signaling (LEI mode) include: 1. Calling Line ID Presentation (CLIP) When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 originated call is directed towards the CAS+ compliant system, Calling Line ID can be provided over the CAS+ interface. This is assuming that the incoming call has the CLID without any presentation restrictions. 2.
Electrical specifications 273 Table 112 LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics Characteristics Description Framing CRC-4 or FAS, only Coding AMI or HDB3 Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit Distance to LTU 0-199.6 meters (0-655 feet) Power requirements Table 113 "LEI card - power required" (page 273) shows the voltage and maximum current that the LEI requires from the backplane.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Parameter Specifications Storage temperature –50 to + 70 C (–58 to 158 F), ambient Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Installation and Configuration Installation and configuration of the LEI consists of six basic steps: Step Action 1 Configure the dip switches on the LEI for the call environment. 2 Install the LEI into the selected card slots.
Installation and Configuration 275 When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 59 "LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 276), the dip switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card for the following parameters: MMI port speed selection This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 59 LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations Line supervision on E1 failure This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports appear to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 in case of E1 failure. Ports can appear as either in the "on-hook" or "off-hook" states on E1 failure. Note: All idle LEI lines go off-hook and seize a Digitone Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on E1 failure.
Installation and Configuration 277 Daisy-Chaining to MMI If two or more LEIs are installed and the MMI used, daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on how many LEIs are being installed. MMI Master or Slave This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem. It determines whether this card is a master or a slave in the daisy chain.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 116 LEI card - signaling-type dip switch settings Switch #1 Characteristic Selection Position 2 Position 8 Signaling Type Loop start OFF OFF Ground start ON OFF Australian P2 OFF ON Table ON ON Table 117 LEI card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) XPEC Address S1 Switch Position 3 S1 Switch Position 4 S1 Switch Position 5 S1 Switch Position 6 00 OFF OFF OFF OFF 01 ON OFF OFF OFF 02 OFF ON OF
Installation and Configuration 279 Table 118 LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings Characteristic Selection E1 framing CRC-4 Disabled Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default 1 ON OFF CRC-4 Enabled E1 coding AMI OFF 2 HDB3 ON OFF OFF NOT USED leave ON 3 ON ON NOT USED leave ON 4 OFF OFF NOT USED leave ON 5 OFF OFF Line processing on E1 link failure On-hook 6 ON ON OFF Off-hook Daisy-chaining to MMI YES 7 NO MMI master or slave Master ON OFF OFF
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Characteristic Selection Line processing on E1 link failure On-hook Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default 6 ON OFF Off-hook Daisy-chaining to MMI YES OFF 7 NO MMI master or slave Master ON OFF OFF 8 Slave ON ON OFF After the card has been installed, display the dip switch settings using the MMI command Display Configuration (D C).
Installation 281 Table 120 LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling Vintage Level Number of ports cabled to I/O panel NT8D37BA 30 ports NT8D37DE 16 ports NT8D37EC 30 ports Available and restricted card slots in the NT8D37 IPE module If installing the LEI into an NT8D37 IPE module, the card slots available depend on the vintage level module.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards the connection of the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card carrier and maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE and CE module I/O panel connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted. Alternatively, all LEI connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slot restrictions.
Installation 283 3. a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal or modem 4. a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI’s P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining. The Tx marking on the adapter at P2 is the LEI output. The E1 data stream coming from the network into the LEI connects at the Rx coaxial connector Table 121 "LEI card - LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts" (page 283) shows the pin assignments of the LEI backplane and I/O Panel.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 122 LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts I/O Panel Connector Pin Lead Designations LEI Connector Pin 1 E1 Tip Receive data 11 26 E1 Ring Receive data 3 2 E1 Tip Transmit data 1 27 E1 Ring Transmit data 9 3 Alarm out, common 1 28 Alarm out (normally open) 2 4 Alarm out (normally closed) 3 7 Toward MMI terminal, receive data 2 31 Toward MMI terminal, transmit data 3 33 Ground 5 8 Control 1 7 32 Control 2 9 33 G
Installation 285 For 75 ohm coaxial installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 though an adapter and out two coaxial connectors Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive). Tx is the LEI output, and Rx is the LEI input from the E1 stream. E1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is hardwired without carrier facilities.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards or more cards to the MMI" (page 287). Cards can be located in up to 15 separate IPE shelves. Start with any card slot in the IPE shelf and connect to any other card slot. Connected card slots do not need to be consecutive.
Installation 287 Figure 60 LEI card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to: • speed – 1200 or 2400 bps • character width – 7 bits • parity bit – mark • stop bits – one • software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Software Configuration Although much of the architecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, the LEI has been designed to em
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards All 30 E1 channels carried by the LEI are individually configured using the analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. Use Table 123 "Card unit number to E1 channel mapping" (page 288) to determine the correct unit number and Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 service-change instructions.
Installation Item TN E1 Channel Number Daughterboard 4 22 Daughterboard 5 23 Daughterboard 6 24 Daughterboard 7 25 Daughterboard 8 26 Daughterboard 9 27 Daughterboard 10 28 Daughterboard 11 29 Daughterboard 12 30 Daughterboard 13 31 289 Disconnect supervision The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system’s detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Clocking Requirement The clocking for NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card in CS1000 Rls 5.
Clocking Requirement 291 Figure 61 MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable Step Action 1 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable to the AUI port of the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 62 "MG1000 chassis" (page 291) shows the AUI port of the MG1000 chassis. 2 In the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis, connect to 15-pin DSUB connector on the back panel formerly used for the 10Base-T AUI connection.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 63 Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis 3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5) • Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 • Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter. Figure 64 "Option 11C Cabinet" (page 292) shows the Option 11C Cabinet.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 293 terminal for the MMI. The following sections describe the options available through the LEI’s MMI terminal and explain how to set-up, configure, and use the MMI.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 1, depending on how the dip switch for line processing is set (dip switch 2, position 6). See Table 118 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings" (page 279). If the MMI detects E1-link failures for any of the other conditions monitored (out-of-frame, excess frame slips, loss-of-signal, and blue alarm condition), the LEI automatically performs all alarm level 2 functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the far-end LTU.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 295 For multiple-card installations connected in a daisy chain, it is accessed by entering L
, where the four-digit address is a combination of the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions on the card Switch 1, positions 3-6, plus the address of the card slot the motherboard occupies. See Table 120 "LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling" (page 281).NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 65 HELP (H, ?) screen Each of these commands can be executed by entering the first letter of the command or by entering the entire command. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first letter of the first word, a space, and the first letter of the second word or by entering the entire command. Table 124 "MMI commands and command sets" (page 296) shows all possible MMI commands in alphabetical order.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 297 Command Description DP Display Performance. Displays performance counters for the current hour. D S(P) Display Status. Displays carrier status, including alarm state and, if active, alarm level. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.) H or ? Help. Displays the Help screen. L Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a single-LEI system. Lxx Login.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Set Date Verify the current date. Do this by entering the Set Date (S D) command. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a new date or hit Enter to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in the "mm/dd/yy" format. Set Alarm The Set Alarm (S A) command sets the parameters by which an alarm is activated and the duration of the alarm after it is activated.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 299 Note: The error-rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm. Remember that the numbers being represented are negative numbers. Since 3 represents –3, and 4 represents –4, 4 represents a smaller number than 3 does.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards A heavy bit-error rate can cause 200 bit errors to occur much more quickly than100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be declared sooner. An alarm condition is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 301 Option Description Frame Slip Threshold Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 5. Frame Slip Duration Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted. After this time period, the counter is reset to 0. Factory default is 2 hours.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 66 Set Simple (S S) no screen Figure 67 Set Simple (S S) yes screen Set Mode At the SET MODE (S M) command, the MMI prompts the user with the current signaling mode, either Default (Australian P2) or Table (of bit values.) Entering a accepts the current value, or the user can type in 1 to revert to the Default, or 2 to edit the table entries. See Figure 68 "Set Mode screen" (page 302).
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software • enter just the AB bits (which is copied to the CD bits) • enter a complete ABCD bit pattern • in the case of optional states, a ’N’ or ’n’ can be entered to indicate that the state is not needed 303 Note that in D4 Framing for E1, there are no CD bits, so they are ignored. The user is prompted for ABCD bit values for the following states when the table mode is selected.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Idle SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends (acting as the CO or PSTN) when the circuit is in the idle state. This value is required. Idle RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when it is in the idle state. This value is required. Blocking RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment is in the blocking or fault state and is unable to accept new calls.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 305 Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that ringing voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is required. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that the ring cycle is in the off portion of the cadence. This value is required.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Outgoing call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to end the call. This value is required. Outgoing call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has released the call. This value is required.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software • Out of frame condition • Loss of signal condition • Blue alarm (AIS) condition 307 Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions are found in "Configuring parameters" (page 297). Bit errors activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm. An out-of-frame condition is declared if 3 consecutive frame bits are in error.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Clear Alarm The Clear Alarm (C A) command clears all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened), the LED goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared, and line processing ceases (for alarm level 2 only). When this command is typed, MMI displays the message Alarm acknowledged. If the alarm condition still exists, an alarm is declared again.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 309 Figure 73 Display Status (D S) screen Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 link according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts are accumulated for an hour, then reset to 0.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards to determine if an alarm condition has been corrected. Clear the error counter, wait a few minutes, and display the performance to see if any errors occurred since the counter was cleared. The MMI display reports on these performance counters through the Display Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) commands. Display Performance Entering the Display Performance (D P) command displays performance counters for the past hour.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 311 The Pause command works the same for Display History as it does for the other display commands. Simply enter D H P to see a report on the performance counters, one screen at a time. Figure 75 Display History (D H) screen As with all Display commands, the Pause command can be used to display a full screen of the history report at a time, by entering D H P. Clear Error Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards terminate at the end of the time period or when a Stop Test command is issued. Only Stop Test stops a test with a duration selection of 99; however, the STOP command terminates a test set to any duration from one to 99. After entering the test number, a prompt similar to Figure 77 "Test parameters screen" (page 312) appears.
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 313 Figure 78 MMI Local loopback test Test 2, external loopback, applies an external loopback to the E1 link. Test data is generated and received by the LEI on all timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the E1 link is defective between the LEI and the external loopback location. If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the E1 link or the LEI could be defective. To isolate the failure to the E1 link, tests 1 and 2 must be run in tandem.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 80 MMI Network loopback test Applications The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances.
Applications 315 Figure 81 LEI connection to IPE For example, the LEI can be used to connect the system to an E1-compatible Voice Response Unit (VRU). An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Open IVR system. In this way, the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 can send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports analog (500/2500-type) telephone functionality, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for further handling.
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Note: Consider LEI audio levels when determining the appropriateness of an application. Figure 83 LEI connection to Norstar system Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 317) "Physical description" (page 318) "Functional description" (page 318) "Electrical specifications" (page 322) "Configuration" (page 323) Introduction The NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card supports the Custom Local Area Signaling Services (CLASS) feature.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) For information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery feature, please refer to Features and Services (NN43001-106-B). For administration and maintenance commands, see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). Physical description CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D37 IPE modules. The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board.
Functional description 319 System software then sends the CND information to the CLASS Modem card, one byte at a time, where it is stored in the message buffer. If the CLASS Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the initiating message, then the additional bytes are discarded and not included in the CND memory buffer. Once all of the CND information has been stored in the memory buffer, the CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) XCMC mapping of TNs TNs DS30X timeslot Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 04 05 06 07 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 The CLASS Modem card is designed to plug into any one of the peripheral card slots of the IPE module.
Functional description 321 Once all of the CND information has been stored in the memory buffer, the CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem card inserts a start and stop bit to each ASCII character sent.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) XCMC mapping of TNs TNs DS30X timeslot Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card. This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card.
Configuration 323 Table 131 CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics Characteristics Description Units per card 32 transmit only modem resources Transmission rate 1200 ± 12 baud The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network. Power requirements The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5V dc ± 1% supply supplied by the power converter in the IPE shelf. The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) The NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 CPU through the Cardlan interface.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Contents The following are the topics in this section: "Introduction" (page 325) "Physical description" (page 326) "Functional description" (page 340) "Architecture" (page 350) "Operation" (page 355) Introduction This section contains information required to install the NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 (DDP2) card. The NT5D97 is a dual-port 2.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card DANGER DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected directly to the Public Switched Network, or other exposed plant networks.
Physical description 327 NT5D97 faceplate Figure 84 "NT5D97 faceplate" (page 327) illustrates the faceplate layout for the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 trunk port status LEDs; and six external connectors. Table 135 "External connectors and LEDs" (page 328) shows the name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the names of the LEDs.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 135 External connectors and LEDs Function Faceplate Designator Switch Connectors LEDs Type Description ENB/DIS Plastic, ESD protected Card Enable/disable switch Unit 0 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 0 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 1 Unit 1 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 1 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 1 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Connect
Physical description • After power-up, before the card is enabled. • When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software. 329 Trunk Disable (DIS) LEDs Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" portions of the card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases: • Upon reception of the "disable loop" message from the software. • After power-up. OOS LEDs Two yellow LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portions of the card are out of service.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Unit 1 Clk Connectors Two RJ11 connectors for connecting: • Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 0. • Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 1. Connector J5 (TRK) A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect: • Digital trunk unit 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs. • Digital trunk unit 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.
Physical description 331 System capacity and performance Physical capacity Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number of DDP2 cards per system is limited by the number of network loops, physical capacity of the shelf, number of DTI2/PRI2 interfaces allowed by the software and the range of DCH addresses.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Voltage Source Current DDP2 (without NTBK51AA) DDP2 (with NTBK51AA) +12V Backplane 25mA 75mA -12V Backplane 25mA 75mA 15.6W 20.8W Total Power (Maximum) Cable requirements This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections. Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple DDP2 cards and the D-channel are associated through software in LD 17.
Physical description 333 — NTCK80AC — NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows. E1 carrier cables NTCK45AA (A0407956) The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120W cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1, D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9 pin males). Figure 85 NTCK45AA Table 139 "NTCK45AA cable pins" (page 333) which follows lists the pin attributes for the NTCK45AA cable.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Name Description Color DDP2 pins I/O Pane pins R-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Ring White P1-8 P3-3 1 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P3 1 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P3 1 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P3 P3-5 1 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P3 P3-9 Cable 1 NT8D7217 (A0617192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120W cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/O filter connector to the 9 pin NCTE connector.
Physical description Description Color DDP2 pins I/O Panel pins 1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-5 N/C 1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-9 N/C Cable Name 335 NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120W cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/O filter panel.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75W coaxial cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC males). Figure 88 NTCK79AA Table 142 "NTCK79AA cable pins" (page 336) lists the pin attributes for the NTCK79AA cable.
Physical description 337 Reference clock cables The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP2 faceplate to the primary or secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1. Figure 89 NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD MSDL/DCH cables External DCH cable The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA D-Channel Handler card.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card • NTCK80AB (18 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable • NTCK80AC (35 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable • NTCK80AD (50 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable Figure 91 NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD Cable diagrams Figure 92 "DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 339) and Figure 93 "DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel" (page 340) provide examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2.
Physical description Figure 92 DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 93 DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel Functional description NT5D97 circuit card locations Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bus. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 341 Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion. NT5D97 has a different DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. Refer to "NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings" (page 341) for DIP switch setting).
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 94 Dip switches for NT5D97AA/AB Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB Impedance level and unit mode The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode on DEI2 OR PRI2. Refer to Table 144 "Impedance level and loop mode switch settings" (page 343). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 343 Table 144 Impedance level and loop mode switch settings Description S9/S15 Switch Setting 1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm 2 Spare X 3 Spare X 4 Unit mode OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode Swit ch Transmission mode A per-trunk switch (S4/S10) provides selection of the digital trunk interface type. Refer to Table 145 "Impedance level and loop mode switch settings" (page 343).
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 147 Trunk interface impedance switch settings Description S8/S14 switch setting 75 ohm OFF OFF ON OFF 120 ohm OFF OFF OFF ON Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB A set of four Dip switches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to ground. Refer to Table 148 "Ring ground switch settings" (page 344).
Functional description 345 Table 150 "NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings" (page 345) shows the possible selection of the NTBK51AA D-channel.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 151 DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD Card Trunks 0 and 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1 TX Mode S2 S10 LBO Setting S3 S13 S4 S14 S5 S15 Receiver Interface S6 S11 General Purpose S12 S7 ENB/DSB mounted on the face plate Port 0 Port 1 S8 S9 S1 Ring Ground S16 DPNSS MSDL S9 Refer to DIP switch locations in Figure 95 "Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD" (page 347). The following parameters are set by DIP switches.
Functional description Figure 95 Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD Trunk 0 switches Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment. Table 152 General purpose switches for NT5D97AD Switch Description S9/S15 Switch Setting S12_1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm S12_2 Spare X S12_3 Spare X S12_4 Unit mode OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode.
Functional description 349 Table 156 Trunk 1 switches Switch Function S7 General Purpose...See Table 152 "General purpose switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348) S10 TX Mode...See Table 153 "TX mode switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348) S13, S14 & S15 LBO...See Table 154 "LBO switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348) S11 RX Impedance...See Table 155 "Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348) Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card MSDL external card Table 159 Switch settings for MSDL external card Switch number Function S9_1-10 X S8_1-10 X Use Table 160 "Switch setting for MSDL external card" (page 350) to set the card address.
Architecture 351 Tracking mode In tracking mode, the DDP2 loop supplies an external clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in tracking mode, with one defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts as a back-up to the primary reference.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Reference clock errors CS 1000 software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check can be configured in LD 73). In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which reference clock is being tracked.
Architecture 353 Clock configurations Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system. A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI2, DTI2, etc. PRI2 cards such as the NT8D72BA are capable of supplying two references of the same clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2 (available at J2) on the NT8D72BA.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Table 162 Clock Controller options - description Clock Option Notes Option 1 This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1. Refer to Figure 97 "Clock Controller - Option 1" (page 355). Option 2 This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock source derived from port 0 of the DDP2.
Operation 355 Figure 97 Clock Controller - Option 1 Operation The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configuration. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 98 Clock Controller - Option 2 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 99 Clock Controller - Option 3 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card Figure 100 Clock Controller - Option 4 Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks. In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot. Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in network loop location.
Operation 359 CAUTION The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the circuit cards. Procedure 15 Installing the NT5D97 Step Action 1 Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D97 is to be installed. The NT5D97 can be installed in any card slot in the Network bus. 2 Unpack and inspect the NT5D97and cables.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card 10 If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 11 If required, install a Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE). or Line Terminating Unit (LTU). 12 Add related office data into switch memory. 13 Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch. The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and the OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on.
Operation 361 CAUTION Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller and DDP2 card must NOT be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, they should be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves. 7 Remove the DDP2 card only if both loops are disabled. If the other circuit of a DDP2 card is in use, DO NOT remove the card. The faceplate switch ENB/DIS must be in the OFF (DIS) position before the card is removed, otherwise the system initializes.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card • The D-Channel (DCH, MSDL, DDCH) maintenance is supported by LD 96. Note: The MSDL self-test is not applicable to the NTBK51AA D-Channel daughterboard. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 363) "Applications" (page 363) Introduction The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones equipped with either ground button recall switches, high-voltage Message Waiting lamps, or low-voltage Message Waiting LEDs. You can install this card in any IPE slot.
NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card • NT5K02EA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Germany • NT5K02FA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card with 6001/2 termination (A/D –4 dB, D/A–1 dB) • NT5K02GA same as NT5K02FA with a different loss plan (A/D –4 dB, D/A –3 dB) • NT5K02HA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Belgium • NT5K02JA low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used i
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 365) "MFC signaling" (page 365) "MFE signaling" (page 367) "Sender and receiver mode" (page 368) "Physical specifications" (page 370) Introduction The XMFC/MFE (Extended Multi-frequency Compelled/Multi-frequency sender-receiver) card is used to set up calls between two trunks. Connections may be between a PBX and a Central Office or between two PBXs.
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card • Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is completed and may contain such information as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both calling parties. Forward and backward signals When one NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card sends a pair of frequencies to a receiving XMFC/MFE card (forward signaling), the receiving XMFC/MFE card must respond by sending a different set of frequencies back to the originating XMFC/MFE card (backward signaling).
MFE signaling Digit Forward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx backward direction DOD-Rx, DID-Tx 4 1380 Hz + 1740 Hz 1140 Hz + 780 Hz 5 1500 Hz + 1740 Hz 1020 Hz + 780 Hz 6 1620 Hz + 1740 Hz 900 Hz + 780 Hz 7 1380 Hz + 1860 Hz 1140 Hz + 660 Hz 8 1500 Hz + 1860 Hz 1020 Hz + 660 Hz 9 1620 Hz + 1860 Hz 900 Hz + 660 Hz 10 1740 Hz + 1860 Hz 780 Hz + 660 Hz 11 1380 Hz + 1980 Hz 1140 Hz + 540 Hz 12 1500 Hz + 1980 Hz 1020 Hz + 540 Hz 13 1620 Hz + 1980 Hz 900 Hz + 540 Hz 14 1740 Hz + 1980 Hz
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Digit Forward direction OG-Tx, IC-Rx Backward direction 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz — 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz — 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz — 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz — 8 900 Hz + 1500 Hz — 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz — 10 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz — Sender and receiver mode The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s CPU and the trunk circuit which uses MFC or MFE signaling.
Sender and receiver mode 369 Table 165 XMFC sender specifications Forward frequencies in DOD mode: 1380, 1500, 1620, 1740, 1860, 1980 Hz Backward frequencies in DOD mode: 1140, 1020, 900, 780, 660, 540 Hz Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.5 Hz from nominal Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels Level difference between frequencies: < 0.5 dB Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation 37 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency Time interval between start of 2 tones: 125 usec.
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Table 167 XMFE sender specifications Forward frequencies in OG mode: 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500 Hz Forward frequencies in IC mode: 1900 Hz Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.25% from nominal Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels Level tolerance: +/- 1.0 dB Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation: 35 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency Time interval between start of 2 tones: 125 usec. Time interval between stop of 2 tones: 125 usec.
Physical specifications Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical Environmental considerations Meets the environment of the system Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT6D70 SILC Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 373) "Physical description" (page 375) "Functional description" (page 375) Introduction The S/T Interface Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA –48V North America, NT6D70 BA –40 V International) provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSLs) to the System.
NT6D70 SILC Line card An NT6D70 SILC card can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. ISDN BRI ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data (D) channel. The BRI interface is referred to as a 2B+D connection as well as a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL).
Functional description 375 Physical description The NT6D70 SILC card is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D70 SILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted in peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D70 SILC Card is a standard-size circuit card designed to be inserted in slots in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.
NT6D70 SILC Line card A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the system over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft). The SILC interface uses a four-conductor cable that provides a differential Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL.
Functional description 377 Other functions of the SILC are: • support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections • execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the S/T interfaces • provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and Meridian 1 system bus format • multiplexes 4 D-channels onto one timeslot • perform activation and deactivation of DSLs • provide loopback control of DSLs • provide a reference clock to the clock controller The NT6D70 S
NT6D70 SILC Line card Micro Controller Unit (MCU) The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.
Functional description 379 The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The IPE bus interface connects an IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.
NT6D70 SILC Line card The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits. The PE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a PE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock controller and converter.
Functional description 381 The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts –48 V from the IPE backplane and provides two watts of power to physical terminations on each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI-compliant ISDN BRI terminals and –40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed two watts.The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power source.
NT6D70 SILC Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT6D71 UILC line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 383) "Physical description" (page 384) "Functional description" (page 384) Introduction The NT6D71 U Interface Line card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer (Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI-defined standard interface.
NT6D71 UILC line card to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the CS 1000. For more information on ISDN BRI, see "ISDN BRI" (page 374). A UILC can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. A maximum of four UILCs are supported in a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. Physical description The NT6D71 UILC is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.
Functional description • perform activation and deactivation of DSLs • provide loopback control of DSLs 385 Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-Channel and supports one physical termination. This termination may be to a Network Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Normally this physical termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that allows up to 8 physical terminals to be connected.
NT6D71 UILC line card The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating program and 8 K of RAM that stores interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus that communicates with the U transceivers. The MCU coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC.
Functional description 387 The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification information from the system CPU to the UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions.
NT6D71 UILC line card The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The PE bus interface connects one PE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.
NT6D80 MSDL card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 389) "Physical description" (page 390) "Functional description" (page 391) "Engineering guidelines" (page 396) "Installation" (page 401) "Maintenance" (page 408) "Replacing MSDL cards" (page 414) "Symptoms and actions" (page 415) "System disabled actions" (page 415) Introduction This document describes the Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card.
NT6D80 MSDL card Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system equipped with MSDL cards is potentially four times greater than when using other cards. Since each MSDL has four ports, representing a single device, a system can support as many as 16 MSDL cards with a maximum of 64 ports.
Functional description 391 Functional description Figure 102 "MSDL block diagram" (page 392) illustrates the MSDL functional block diagram. The MSDL card is divided into four major functional blocks: • CPU bus interface • Micro Processing Unit (MPU) • Memory • Serial interface Two processing units serve as the foundation for the MSDL operation: the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the MSDL Micro Processing Unit (MPU).
NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 102 MSDL block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 393 Micro Processing Unit (MPU) The MPU, which is based on a Motorola 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, communicating via the CPU bus with the system.Prioritized interrupts tell the MPU which tasks to perform. Memory The MSDL card contains two megabytes of Random Access Memory (RAM) for storing downloaded peripheral software that controls MSDL port operations.
NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 103 "MSDL functional block diagram" (page 395) shows the system architecture using the MSDL as an operational platform. It illustrates operation routing from the CPU, through the MSDL, to the I/O equipment. It also shows an example in which DCH operation peripheral software in the MSDL controls functions on ports 2 and 3. MSDL operations The system automatically performs self-test and data flow activities.
Functional description 395 Figure 103 MSDL functional block diagram Data flow The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This interface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the transmit buffer on the MSDL. The transmit buffer transports these messages to the appropriate buffers, from which the messages travel over the MSDL port to the I/O equipment. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.
NT6D80 MSDL card The MSDL uses the MSDL receive interface to communicate with the system. The MSDL card receives packetized data from the I/O equipment over the MSDL ports. This data is processed by the MSDL handler and sent to the appropriate function. The flow control mechanism provides an orderly exchange of transmit and receive messages for each operation. Each operation has a number of outstanding messages stored in buffers waiting to be sent to their destinations.
Engineering guidelines 397 The MSDL card addresses are set using decimal switches located on the card. These switches can select 100 unique card addresses from 0 to 99. An address conflict may occur between the MSDL and other cards because of truncated address decoding by the other cards. For example, if a DCHI port is set to address 5, it’s companion port is set to address 4, which means that none of the MSDL cards can have hexadecimal address numbers 05H, 15H, É75H, nor addresses 04H, 14H, É74H.
NT6D80 MSDL card Table 171 Asynchronous interface specifications Parameter Specification Configured Data bit, parity 7 bits even, odd or no parity, or 8 bits no parity Software Data rate 0.3, 0.6, (1.2), 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, and 38.4 kbps Software Stop bits 1 (default), 1.
Engineering guidelines Pin Signal name EIA circuit CCITT circuit DTE X 399 DCE 2 Transmit Data (TX) BA 103 3 Receive Data (RX) BB 104 4 Request to Send (RTS) CA 105 5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 107 X 7 Signal Ground (SG) AB 102 8 Carrier Detect (CD) CF 109 X 15 Serial Clock Transmit (SCT) DB 114 X 17 Serial Clock Receive (SCR) DD 115 X 18 Local Loopback (LL) LL 141 X 20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) CD 108.
NT6D80 MSDL card EIA Circuit Pin Signal Name DTE DCE 15 Transmit Signal Timing (TSTa) DBa X 16 Receive Data (RXb) BBb X 17 Receive Signal Timing (RSTa) DDa X 20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) CD X 23 Terminal Timing (TTa) DAb X 24 Terminal Timing (TTb) DAa X Implementation guidelines The following are guidelines for engineering and managing MSDL cards: • An MSDL can be installed in any empty network card slot.
Installation 401 A stable ambient operating temperature of approximately 22 C (72 F) is recommended. The temperature differential in the room should not exceed ±3 C (±5 F). The internal power supply in each module provides DC power for the MSDL and other cards. Power consumption and heat dissipation for the MSDL is listed in Table 175 "MSDL power consumption" (page 401). Table 175 MSDL power consumption Voltage (VAC) Current (Amps) Power (Watts) Heat (BTUs) +5 3.20 16.00 55.36 +12 0.10 1.20 4.
NT6D80 MSDL card DCE switch DTE switch Interface Comment OFF ON RS-422 DTE All switches configured ON OFF RS-422 DCE All switches configured ON ON N/A Not allowed Figure 104 MSDL switch setting example Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Installation 403 Installing the MSDL card Procedure 17 Installing the MSDL card Step Action To install an MSDL card follow these steps: 1 Set Device Number S10 and S9. 2 Hold the MSDL by its card-locking devices. Squeeze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out and away from the card. Be careful not to touch connector pins, conductor traces, or integrated circuits. Static discharge may damage integrated circuits.
NT6D80 MSDL card Cable requirements The MSDL card includes four high-density 26-pin (SCSI II) female connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector for the monitor port. See Figure 105 "MSDL cabling" (page 405) for a diagram of the MSDL cabling configuration. A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a connection from the appropriate MSDL port connector to the DCH connector located on the ISDN PRI trunk faceplate.
Installation 405 Figure 105 MSDL cabling Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For example, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a customized or external vendor cable is required.
NT6D80 MSDL card Cable installation When the MSDL card is installed, connect the cables to the equipment required for the selected operation. PRI trunk connections D-channel operations require connections between the MSDL and a PRI trunk card. Refer to ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-569) for a complete discussion of PRI and D-channels.
Installation 407 3 Route the cable to the rear of the module next to the I/O panel. 4 Plug the DB25 male connector end of a cable into a DB25 female connector at the back of the I/O panel. 5 Secure cable connectors in place with their fasteners. 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each connection. —End— MSDL planning form Use the following planning form to help sort and store information concerning the MSDL cards in your system as shown in the sample.
NT6D80 MSDL card Sample 2 AML 3 Spare 3 RS-232 DCE NTND27AB RS-232 Maintenance Routine maintenance consists of enabling and disabling MSDL cards and downloading new versions of peripheral software. These activities are performed by an authorized person such as a system administrator. Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determining problem types, isolating problem sources, and solving the problem. A craftsperson normally performs these activities.
Maintenance 409 Figure 106 MSDL states A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 106 "MSDL states" (page 409)). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stops all system communication with the card (step 5 in Figure 106 "MSDL states" (page 409)).
NT6D80 MSDL card The system disables the MSDL if the card: • exhibits an overload condition • does not respond to system messages • is removed • resets itself • encounters a fatal error • is frequently system disabled and recovered When an MSDL is system disabled, a substate indicates why the MSDL is disabled. The substates are: • Not Responding The system cannot communicate with the MSDL. • Self-Testing The MSDL card is performing self-tests.
Maintenance 411 System controlled maintenance Built-in diagnostic functions constantly monitor and analyze the system and individual card, performing the following operations: • using autorecovery to automatically correct a temporarily faulty condition and maintain the system and its components • printing information and error messages to indicate abnormal conditions that caused a temporary or an unrecoverable error During system initialization, the system examines the MSDL base code.
NT6D80 MSDL card Enabling the MSDL Enter ENL MSDL x to enable the MSDL manually. If the MSDL base code has not been previously downloaded or if the card version is different from the one on the system disk, the software is downloaded and the card is enabled. To force software download and enable the card, enter ENL MSDL x FDL. This command forces the download of the MSDL base code and the configured peripheral software even if it is already resident on the card. The card is then enabled.
Maintenance 413 Manually isolating and correcting faults Problems are due to configuration errors that occur during installation or hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See "Symptoms and actions" (page 415) for more information on problem symptoms and required responses. Isolate MSDL faults using the diagnostic tools described below: Step Action 1 Observe and list the problem symptoms; for example, a typical symptom is a permanently lit LED.
NT6D80 MSDL card 3 If the card has been disabled by the system, disable it manually with DIS MSDL x. Table 4 Invoke self-testing with the SLFT MSDL x command. "Self-testing the MSDL" (page 412) If self-tests fail, replace the card. If self-tests pass, try to enable the card again, as in step 2. If the card does not enable, note the message output to the TTY and follow the recommended action.
System disabled actions 415 10 Connect the cables to the MSDL faceplate connectors. 11 At the . prompt in the LD 37 program, type ENL MSDL x ALL and press Enter to enable the MSDL and its operations. If the red LED on the MSDL turns off, the MSDL is functioning correctly. Since self-tests were not invoked, no result message appears. 12 Tag the defective card(s) with a description of the problem and return them to your Nortel representative.
NT6D80 MSDL card Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the system. Action: Check the MSDL messages on the console and take the action recommended. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). Verify that the address switches on the MSDL are set correctly. Verify that the card is properly installed in the shelf for at least 5 minutes. If the problem persists, manually disable the card by entering the DIS MSDL x.
System disabled actions 417 MSDL 10: SYS DSBL—SELFTEST PASSED NO RECOVERY UNTIL MIDNIGHT: FAILED BASE DNLD 5 TIMES SDI 10 DIS PORT 0 AML 11 DIS PORT 1 DCH 12 DIS PORT 2 AML 13 DIS PORT 3 Error messages usually indicate the problem in this case. See "Maintaining the MSDL" (page 410). SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS FAILED Cause: The card did not pass self-tests. These tests repeat five times. If unsuccessful, autorecovery stops until midnight unless you take action.
NT6D80 MSDL card Check the traffic report, which may indicate that one or more MSDL ports are handling excessive traffic. By disabling each port, identify the port with too much traffic and allow the remaining ports to operate normally. Refer to "Maintaining the MSDL" (page 410). If the problem persists, place the card in the manually disabled state by the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in "Previously operating MSDL cards" (page 413).
NT7D16 Data Access card Content list The following are the topics in this section: "Introduction" (page 420) "Features" (page 420) "Controls and indicators" (page 421) "Dialing operations" (page 422) "Operating modes" (page 426) "Keyboard dialing" (page 453) "Hayes dialing" (page 462) "Specifications" (page 472) "System database requirements" (page 475) "Power supply" (page 478) "Installing the Data Access card" (page 479) "Port configuration" (page 481) "Cabling" (page 482) "Backplane pinout and signa
NT7D16 Data Access card Introduction The NT7D16 Data Access card (DAC) is a data interface card that integrates the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-Port Interface Line card (RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line card (AILC). This combination allows the NT7D16 DAC to work with the RS-232-C interface, the RS-422 interface, or both. The DAC supports up to six ports, each capable of operating in RS-232-C or RS-422 mode.
Controls and indicators 421 Controls and indicators The LEDs on the DAC faceplate indicate the status mode for each port. Figure 107 "NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate" (page 423) shows the NT7D16 DAC faceplate. Card status The LED at the top of the faceplate is unlabeled. This LED is: • off: if one or more ports are enabled • on: if all ports are disabled Electronic Industries Association signal monitors The six LEDs located below the card status LED are labeled SD, RD, DTR, DSR, DCD, and RI.
NT7D16 Data Access card Dialing operations The DAC supports both keyboard and Hayes dialing sequences. The following discussion concerns features common to both dialing modes. Port firmware in idle state The port firmware is considered idle when it is expecting one of the allowed autobaud characters. The idle state is identified by either of the following conditions: • The last prompt received was RELEASED (keyboard dialing). • The last prompt received was OK, NO CARRIER, or ERROR (Hayes dialing).
Dialing operations 423 Figure 107 NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate Call Set-up abort The user may abandon the call during the dialogue phase using one of the following methods: • Terminal off-line This method is useful for RS-232-C interface only. The equipment drops Data Terminal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT7D16 Data Access card connection. For example, if the equipment is turned off, the DAC interprets that signal as an idle connection. • Long break The user sends a break (transmit line held in the OFF or SPACE state) for more than 1.2 seconds. The break is not transmitted to the far end. At the end of the long break, the DAC port initiates call disconnect. The AILU converts the dropping of DTR into a long break for the RS-422 interface.
Dialing operations 425 Wire test mode The DAC allows for the EIA signaling leads to be tested to facilitate installation and troubleshooting. This feature can be invoked through the service change downloaded parameters, or by setting the appropriate front panel switch. Wire test mode only operates when the port is idle. The leads are cycled ON and OFF in 0.5 second periods (ON for 0.5 seconds, OFF for 0.
NT7D16 Data Access card The DAC maintains separate buffers for keyboard and Hayes dialing modes. Changes made to a given parameter in one mode do not affect that parameter in the other mode. When a dialing mode is selected, the DAC copies the corresponding dialing parameters into the active buffer. This buffer controls the call processing. If the DAC receives an incoming call while idle, the most recent dialing mode is used to answer the call.
Operating modes 427 Table 179 DAC mode of operation selection Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline DEM PRM DTR HOT 0 (DTE) OFF OFF "Host On" (Ri Not ng Indicator Forced — RI) OFF Not Hotline Modem Pool inbound and outbound (similar to Synchronous / Asynchronous Data Module (SADM) in inbound) MSB by RI 1 (DTE) OFF "Host On" (RI) OFF Not Forced ON Hotline Modem Pool inbound only (Hotline by RIsimilar to SADM) 2 (DTE) O
NT7D16 Data Access card Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline DEM PRM DTR HOT 6 (DTE) ON "KBD On" (No RI) ON Forced OFF Not Hotline Gateway inbound and outbound (DTR is on in idle state) MSB by DCD 7 (DTE) ON "KBD On" (No RI) ON Forced ON Hotline Gateway inbound only (Hotline by DCD: ON for Hotline OFF for VLL) (DTR is ON in idle state) 8 (DCE) OFF "Host On" (prompts off) OFF Not Forced OFF Not Hotline Outbou
Operating modes 429 Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline DEM PRM DTR HOT 13 (DCE) ON "KBD On" (prompts on) OFF Not Forced On Hotline Terminal similar to ASIM when set to Not Forced DTR and Hotline 14 (DCE) ON "KBD On" (prompts on) ON Forced OFF Not Hotline Terminal similar to ASIM when set to forced DTR and Not Hotline 15 (DCE) ON "KBD On" (prompts on) ON Forced On Hotline Continuous Hotline when DTR is ON Type
NT7D16 Data Access card the call is dropped by the DAC. If the modem turns DCD ON before the 35-second timeout, the DAC validates the incoming call and prepares to accept from the remote modem for autobaud. See Figure 108 "DAC to modem connectivity" (page 430) for more details. Figure 108 DAC to modem connectivity Mode 0 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a modem, except Hayes-1200, for inbound and outbound modem pooling (see modes 2 and 3 for Hayes-1200 modem).
Operating modes 431 Auto-reset capability This feature is required when the modem is used for outbound modem pooling. The modem should execute auto-reset when the DTR lead goes OFF. As a result, the modem must reset all its internal parameters to the default values. This feature prevents the users of the modem pool from modifying the modem’s default parameters to inappropriate values.
NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 109 DAC to Modem Pool connectivity Mode 1 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to an auto-answer modem for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the DAC automatically executes Hotline operation when RI is driven ON by the modem. The following modem features are required: Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the modem is used for inbound modem pooling.
Operating modes 433 The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by switches 6 and 8, and the system should be programmed to allow inbound modem calls only. Configuring modems for mode 1 Most dumb modems can be configured for this mode. The modem must be able to auto-answer and use dynamic control of DCD as described in mode 0. Smart modems can also be used if set to the dumb mode of operation.
NT7D16 Data Access card To configure this modem, set the configuration switches as follows: • switches 3, 8, and 10 to DOWN position • all other switches to UP position. Switch 7 should be UP when using RJ-11 jack. Programing DAC for mode 2 in service change LD11 When used for inbound or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD11. When used for both inbound and outbound Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232.
Operating modes 435 • The equipment does not drive RI lead (optional, the DAC ignores this lead). • The equipment must drive DCD lead dynamically. • The equipment drives DSR lead (optional). • The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optional, depending on the mode selected). In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the DAC: • operates as a DTE • monitors the DSR • monitors DCD control leads • drives the DTR lead The RI lead is ignored. No menus or prompts are given when DCD is OFF.
NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 110 DAC to Gateway connectivity Mode 4 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway for inbound and outbound operation. The characteristics of the gateways to be used with this mode are: Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the gateway is used for inbound operation. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON when the inbound data call is pending. In addition, the gateway should auto-answer when the DTR lead is ON.
Operating modes 437 Programing DAC for mode 4 in service change LD 11 When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as station hunting, outbound gateway access should be in the opposite direction to the hunting for inbound gateway access. See Figure 111 "DAC to Gateway-Inbound/Outbound connectivity" (page 437) for more details.
NT7D16 Data Access card Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all gateways to be connected to the DAC. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON when the data call is established, and OFF when the data call is disconnected. The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by the AUTB and BAUD parameters in LD 11. The system should be programmed to allow inbound modem calls only.
Operating modes 439 Programing DAC for mode 7 in service change LD 11 The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk. Selecting the proper mode for Host connectivity Select modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 when the DAC is connected to different types of hosts (DTE). In these modes, the DAC operates as a DCE and drives DSR, DCD, and RI control leads (see Figure 112 "DAC to Host connectivity" (page 439)).
NT7D16 Data Access card incoming call. If the host drives the DTR lead ON all the time, incoming calls are always immediately answered and the RI lead is not turned ON by the DAC. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON. Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be capable of releasing an established call. The host should be able to drop an established data call by driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms.
Operating modes 441 Mode 10 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host for inbound host accessing. The host in this mode is not required to monitor RI or drive DTR. This mode is similar to mode 8, except for the following: • The status of DTR lead is assumed to be always ON, even when the actual condition of that lead is OFF (forced-DTR). The DAC always answers an incoming call regardless of the status of DTR. • The host cannot release an established data call by driving DTR OFF.
NT7D16 Data Access card Programing DAC for mode 11 in service change LD 11 The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk. Selecting the proper mode for Terminal connectivity Select modes 12, 13, 14,and 15 when the DAC is connected to different types of terminals.
Operating modes 443 The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped or when control—Z is entered during the idle state. In this case, the DAC drives those leads OFF for 0.2 seconds and then ON. When the DTR lead is driven OFF by the terminal, the DAC does not execute autobaud nor responds to any command. Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make Set Busy is activated when DTR is driven OFF for more than five seconds.
NT7D16 Data Access card Programing DAC for mode 14 in service change LD 11 The DAC must be configured as R232 since Autodial, Speed Call, and Display commands are likely to be used. Mode 15 This mode provides a "virtual leased line" and the meaning of the "Forced DTR" switch is re-defined. This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal (DTE) and continuous Hotline call origination is required.
Operating modes 445 See Table 180 "Connect and disconnect protocol" (page 445) for connect and disconnect protocol. Table 180 Connect and disconnect protocol Mode of operation Mode 0 Interface application Comments Inbound and Outbound modem pools Outbound modem pooling: For inbound modem pools, most dumb modems may be used. For outbound modem pools, only smart modems (auto-dialer) may be used. Modem sends ring/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4 seconds OFF) to initiate connection.
NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments DAC drops DTR if the remote modem sends a long break or three short breaks. The modem must drop DCD. Call disconnection (modem): Modem drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call. Modem drops DSR (DSR OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call. Mode 1 Inbound Hotline modem pools Most dumb modems can be used for this application.
Operating modes 447 Mode of operation Interface application Comments —The DAC ignores RI and DCD for about 2 seconds after releasing a call. This avoids problems with the Hayes 1200 modem. Mode 3 Inbound Hotline modem pools (with forced DTR) Use this mode with Hayes 1200 modem. Inbound Hotline modem pooling: The DAC operation is identical to mode 1 except that DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect). Call disconnection: Disconnection is identical to mode 2.
NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments Call disconnection (DAC): DAC drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The Gateway must drop DCD. DAC drops DTR if the DAC receives a long break or three short breaks. The Gateway must drop DCD. Call disconnection (Gateway): Gateway drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call. Gateway drops DSR (DSR OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.
Operating modes 449 Mode of operation Mode 6 Interface application Comments Inbound and Outbound Gateway access (with forced DTR) Inbound and Outbound Gateway protocol: The DAC operation is identical to mode 4 except that DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect). The establishment of the outbound call does not require DCD to be driven ON by the Gateway. Call disconnection: Disconnection is identical to mode 4 except that when a call is released, the DAC turns DTR OFF for 0.
NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments DAC prepares to receive for autobaud. Host sends followed by other commands for establishing a data call (the DAC does not echo a command, nor does it send any prompt to the Host (blind dialing). When the data call is completely established, the DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS ON as long as the call is connected. Call disconnect ion (DAC): DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user releases the call.
Operating modes 451 Mode of operation Interface application Comments Disconnection is identical to mode 8. Mode 10 Host access for call origination and answering (with forced DTR) Host access for call origination and answering: The DAC operation is identical to mode 8 except DTR is always considered ON, even when the Host is driving DTR OFF. Call disconnection: DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host should then drop the call.
NT7D16 Data Access card Mode of operation Interface application Comments When terminal receives RI ON, it should respond by turning DTR ON. DAC answers when DTR goes ON and the local DM user is now transparently linked to the terminal. Terminal originating an outgoing data call: DAC drives DSR, DCD, and CTS ON in the idle state. Terminal turns DTR ON to initiate the connection. DAC prepares to receive for autobaud.
Keyboard dialing Mode of operation Interface application 453 Comments DTR ON, the DAC does not try to establish another Hotline call unless the terminal sends a while DTR is ON. Call disconnection: Disconnection is identical to mode 12. Mode 14 Terminal access for call origination and answering (with forced DTR) Terminal access for call origination and answering: The DAC operation is identical to mode 12 except that DTR is considered to be always ON, even when the terminal is driving DTR OFF.
NT7D16 Data Access card The following keyboard dialing features are supported with the DAC: • Autobaud from 110 to 19200 bps • Autoparity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readable on the data terminal during the interactive dialogue mode • Originating calls to local and remote hosts • Ring Again • Speed Call • Two answer modes for incoming calls: manual and auto • Digit display • Dialing by mnemonic Initiating conditions In order for the DAC to respond to user commands/entrie
Keyboard dialing 455 Prompts requiring a Yes or No answer are terminated by a question mark (?), followed by a list of allowable responses. The default response, if allowed, is bracketed. Call abort In addition to the methods mentioned above, which are common to both Hayes and keyboard modes, keyboard dialing supports the following method to abort a call during the dialogue phase.
NT7D16 Data Access card When the user enters the autobaud character, , and the dialing mode is Manual (not Hotline), the DAC sends the following menu: ENTER NUMBER OR H (FOR HELP): If the user enters , the DAC presents this prompt again. When a number is entered, the DAC attempts to place the call.
Keyboard dialing 457 CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS Autodial (A) The Autodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored within the local system. The DAC automatically attempts to place a data call to the Autodial number: A CALLING xxxxxxx RINGING ANSWERED CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS The currently stored Autodial number may be viewed by entering the primary command D (Display), followed by the selection A (Autodial). See the Display discussion later in this document.
NT7D16 Data Access card Both the Autodial and Speed Call commands can be changed with the Modify command (M). Additionally, the Speed Call number can be changed in the service change. When this command is entered, the Modify menu appears. Modify Menu: A - Auto Number D - DCD Control L - Long Break M - Manual Answer Q - Quit Modify Menu R - Remote Loopback S - Speed Call CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing) Select: Any of these choices leads to another series of prompts and responses.
Keyboard dialing 459 By entering R on the keyboard, you enter the Remote Loopback Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the Remote Loopback feature. R Remote Loopback Disabled (or enabled, indicating current status) Remote Loopback (Y/N): Y or N Remote Loopback: Enabled (or Disabled) By entering M on the keyboard, you enter the Manual Answer Modify menu. Manual Answer indicates that the DAC prompts the user to answer an incoming data call.
NT7D16 Data Access card DCD Control: DynamicDCD Control: Forced On By entering L on the keyboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the detection of the Long Break as an abandon signal. L Long Break:Detected Ignored Detect Long Break? (Y/N): Y N Long Break: Detected Long Break: Ignored To exit the Modify menu, enter Q. This entry returns you to the Primary commands menu.
Keyboard dialing 461 CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing) Select: If a Ring Again request has already been placed, the DAC offers the option of overriding the previous request. RING AGAIN ACTIVE, REPLACE? (Y/N): Y RING AGAIN PLACED Primary Commands Menu: A - Auto Dial C - Call D - Display M - Modify S - Speed Call CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing) Select: When the called DN becomes available, the system notifies the DAC, which then prompts the user to place the call.
NT7D16 Data Access card C - Call M - Modify D - Display CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing) Select: Not in service When the DAC attempts a call to a DN that is not supported, it sends you a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Autobaud character to initiate keyboard dialing again.
Hayes dialing • Character echo control • On-hook/off-hook control • Detect off-line escape sequence • Return to on-line • Initiate Remote Digital Loopback • Terminate Remote Digital Loopback • Modify S Registers S0 through S12 • Display S Registers S0 through S12 • Support all S Registers except: S6, S7, S9, and S11 463 The Hayes dialing mode supports the following AT Dialing commands.
NT7D16 Data Access card The maximum number of characters is 43. This limit includes the AT prefix, and the record Terminator character, but does not include the ASCII space character. Echo Throughout the dialogue phase, the DAC echoes all user input. In RS-232-C modes 0, 1, 2, and 3, no inbound call messages are presented to the modem. Prompts are presented only if the modem user originates the call. In modes 8, 9, 10, and 11, no prompts or characters echo under any circumstances.
Hayes dialing 465 Table 181 Hayes dialing result codes and messages Verbose code Numer ic code Description OK 0 Command(s) executed, no error CONNECT 1 Data call established, session starts RING 2 Inbound call presented NO CARRIER 3 Data call abandoned ERROR 4 Error in command line NO DIALTONE 6 System does not allow call to proceed BUSY 7 Far end is busy NO ANSWER 8 Far end does not answer CONNECT 1200 5 Session starts at 1200 baud CONNECT 2400 10 Session starts at 2400 ba
NT7D16 Data Access card Dialing operation Like keyboard dialing, the Hayes dialing commands allow the user to initiate a data call, as well as change certain dialing parameters. The commands may be entered in either upper or lower case, but must be the same case throughout the command line. Also the case must match the autobaud case. Note: Hayes dialing does not allow for the Ring Again feature. If a call is made to a busy number, that call is abandoned.
Hayes dialing Command Description ATEn Echo (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, commands echo back to terminal) ATTSP! Transparent mode 467 Note 1: To use AT dialing, enter CTRL-z at carriage return () when the port is idle. Note 2: Follow each command (except A/) by a carriage return () to execute it. For the purposes of this document, when illustrating the prompt/response sequences, the bold type is what the user enters on the keyboard. All other type represents the DAC output.
NT7D16 Data Access card Table 183 Allowable S registers S register Range Range units Supported Description S0 0–255 Rings Yes Number of rings to answer a system call (0 = manual answer) S1 0–255 Rings Yes Ring count for the current inbound system call S2 0–127 ASCII Yes Off-line escape sequence character S3 0–127 ASCII Yes Input/output line terminating character S4 0–127 ASCII Yes New line character for the output line S5 0–32, 127 ASCII Yes Backspace character for inpu
Hayes dialing 469 OK Reset Hayes parameters All of the Hayes dialing parameters and S registers remain even after the data call is complete. Similarly, if the dialing mode, keyboard to Hayes or vice versa, are changed, the parameters remain as specified. The following command allows you to reset the parameters and S registers to the defaults. Entering 0 resets to the Hayes default, while entering 1 resets to the downloaded operating parameters. CAUTION All previous instructions are ignored.
NT7D16 Data Access card Parameter Value Description S3 13 Terminator character Carriage Return () S4 10 New line character Line Feed () S5 8 Back space character BS () S6 2 Blind dial delay 2 seconds S7 30 Timeout for outbound call answer 30 seconds S8 2 Dial pause delay 2 seconds S9 6 Carrier detect response time 0.6 seconds S10 14 Call disconnect timer for carrier loss 1.4 seconds S11 95 Touchtone space 95 milliseconds S12 50 Escape sequence guard timer 1.
Hayes dialing 471 RING RING RING CONNECT Issuing the On Hook command while the call is still ringing disconnects the incoming call. The DAC disconnects the call and notifies you with a NO CARRIER message. RING RING ATH0 NO CARRIER When the S0 register is set to 0, the DAC is set to manual answer, and an inbound call must be answered with the Answer command. You can also abandon the call with the On Hook message, as in the Autodial sequence.
NT7D16 Data Access card complete list of the parameters allowed for each S Register, see Table 184 "Hayes parameters and S register reset values" (page 469) describing the S Registers. In the following example, is the Guard Time and the Escape Character defined in the S2 register. The example shows the Off Line escape sequence, the command to display an S register (Ring Count, in this case), and the command to go back on line and attend to the answered call.
Specifications 473 — 60 minutes • DDN: 1 to 7 digits (0–9) Operating parameters There are thirteen parameters configured in the system that are downloaded to the DAC.
NT7D16 Data Access card — Disabled—On with DTR (normal) — Enabled—Off with DTR (modes 8 or 12, and no DTR for 5 seconds) • Auto Baud — Variable (use auto baud rate) — Fixed (use baud rate selection only) • Baud rate — 110 — 150 — 300 — 600 — 1200 — 2400 — 4800 — 9600 — 19200 • Operating mode — DCE — DTE • Equipment type — Terminal (send prompts/replies) — Host (suppress prompts/replies) • Long Break Detect In Table 161 "Clock Controller options - summary" (page 353) and Figure 104 "MSDL switc
System database requirements 475 affect the operating parameters, this is useful to monitor and confirm port settings. An additional parameter is listed in the uploaded information: port interface mode (RS-232-C/RS-422). The interface is set by the use of jumpers on the DAC, and cannot be altered by the service change. System database requirements To ensure proper operation of the DAC keyboard and Hayes dialing, the system requires the following: • The Data DN must appear only once.
NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 114 Operating mode selection-RS422 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
System database requirements Figure 115 Operating mode selection-RS-232-C Note: Warning Tone Denied (WTD) defaults if DTA is entered. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT7D16 Data Access card • If the DAC is used to call out through modem pooling, where the modem pool consists of dumb modems connected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12 V.35 SADM, the DAC port should be configured with a secondary DN, which has a single appearance. • The Virtual keys must be assigned as shown in Table 186 "Virtual key assignments" (page 478).
Installing the Data Access card EIA DB-25 Pin Signal abbreviation CC 6 AB 479 Description DCE mode DTE mode DSR Data Set Ready Out In 7 GND Signal Ground — — CF 8 DCD Carrier Detect Out In CD 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready In Out CE 22 RI Ring Indicator Out In Note: RS-422 leads supported are: Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive). Environmental The DAC functions fully when operating within the following specified conditions.
NT7D16 Data Access card Large System In Large Systems, the DAC is fully supported in IPE modules. These special slots on the DAC have 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in card slots 0-15. The IPE slot supports the first four ports on the DAC if connections are made at the MDF. Most IPE modules can be upgraded to wire 24-pair cables to the MDF for all card slots.
Port configuration 481 Table 189 System option compatibility with the DAC System option Backplane code Backplane release Upgrade Maximum no. of ports/DAC supported Large Systems NT8D3701 3 and below No 4 Large Systems NT8D3701 4 and above Yes 6 Port configuration Figure 116 "NT7D16 Data Access Card port connectors" (page 482) shows the port configurations for both the RS-232-C and RS-422 ports. The software configuration requirements for the DAC are shown at the end of this chapter.
NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 116 NT7D16 Data Access Card port connectors Cabling Several cabling schemes are possible for both AILC and RILC modes. Typical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cables is shown in the Table 190 "RS-232-C maximum line capacitance 2,500 µF" (page 483) and Table 191 "RS-422 maximum line capacitance 60,000 µF" (page 483). RS-232 and RS-422 transmission distance is limited by the electrical capacitance of the cable.
Cabling 483 Table 190 RS-232-C maximum line capacitance 2,500 µF Gauge Capacitance per foot (µF) Max distance 24 24 104 26 15 166 Table 191 RS-422 maximum line capacitance 60,000 µF Gauge Capacitance per foot (µF) Max distance 24 24 2500 26 15 4000 Figure 117 "Cabling to the data equipment" (page 484) shows the cabling choices available. It includes cabling with the RS-232-C cable, associated patch panel, the RJ-11, and the octopus cable.
NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 117 Cabling to the data equipment Figure 118 "RJ-11 or RJ-45 jacks" (page 485) shows a connection through an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the data station. It is recommended that four wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack. Another cable is required to convert the RJ-11 or RJ-45 into DB25. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Cabling 485 Note: It is necessary to turn over Receive Data and Send Data between the DAC and the AILU. This is done on the TN at the MDF. Figure 118 RJ-11 or RJ-45 jacks Figure 119 "Patch panel layout" (page 486) illustrates the patch panel. RS-232-C cables are used to connect the data equipment to the patch panel. This particular panel shows two 50-pin connectors into twelve DB25. The signals from the MDF travel on 25-pair cables, terminating at the patch panel.
NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 119 Patch panel layout Note: Use an octopus cable that follows the pinout of the DAC, such as QCAD318A (female) and QCAD319A (male), in conjunction with a 50-pin female-to-female gender converter. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Backplane pinout and signaling 487 Figure 120 Octopus cabling Backplane pinout and signaling Two 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connectors connect the card to the backplane. The detailed pinout configurations are listed in Table 192 "RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports" (page 488) and Table 193 "RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for last three DAC ports" (page 489). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT7D16 Data Access card Table 192 RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Unit no. Signal Pin no.
Backplane pinout and signaling I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color 12T 37 12R 12 Unit no. Signal Pin no. BK-O RI2 22 O-BK CTS2 5 489 Patch pair or octopus RS-422 Signal Note 1: The RS-232 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC723 RILC. Note 2: The RS-422 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC430 AILC (first pair: Receive Data; second pair: Send Data).
NT7D16 Data Access card I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Signal Pin no. RS-422 Signal 22T 47 V-O DTR5 20 SDA5 22R 22 O-V GND5 7 SDB5 23T 48 V-G DCD5 8 23R 23 G-V DSR5 6 24T 49 V-BR RI5 22 24R 24 BR-V CTS5 5 Unit no. Patch pair or octopus Connector 3 Note: Units 4 and 5 are available when the DAC is installed in a fully wired 24-pair slot. Configuring the Data Access card LD 11 must be configured to accept the DAC.
Configuring the Data Access card Prompt Response Description OPE (NO) YES Operation parameter change PAR (SPAC) ODD EVEN MARK SPAC = space parity ODD = odd parity EVEN = even parity MARK = mark parity DTR (OFF) ON DTR settings, where: ON = forced DTR OFF = dynamic DTR This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232 HOT (OFF) ON Hotline If HOT = ON, then AUTB = OFF AUT (ON) OFF Automatic answer AUTB (ON) OFF Autobaud Prompt appears only if HOT - OFF BAUD 0-(7)-8 Baud rate, where: 0 1 2 3 4 5
NT7D16 Data Access card Prompt Response Description PRM (ON) OFF Prompt mode, where: ON = prompt (Terminal) mode OFF = no prompt (Host) mode DEM (DCE) DTE Data Equipment mode This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232.
Configuring the Data Access card 493 Printing the card parameters (LD 20) By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC. This is useful to determine if any parameters have been altered during keyboard or Hayes dialing modify procedures. LD 20 - Print DAC parameters.
NT7D16 Data Access card DBASE R-232 or R-422 UPLOAD R-232 or R-422 WIRE OFF OFF PBDO OFF OFF Note: The Upload parameters are printed only when a single TN is specified. Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC The Apple Macintosh can be connected with twisted pair wire to a port of a NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) to allow access to the switching capability. The Macintosh can then access local or remote terminals, personal computers, hosts, and peripherals.
Upgrading systems 495 Figure 122 Macintosh to DAC connection-mini-8 DIN Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade The DAC can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cabling changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be made. Follow this procedure to upgrade your cabling. You can upgrade the cabling segment-by-segment, or the entire module at one time. Note 1: Four NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies are required to upgrade the entire module, one assembly per segment.
NT7D16 Data Access card Segment 1 Step Action 1 Leave cable E as is in slot L4. 2 Move cable end F-3 to L5-3. 3 Remove cable G from the backplane and connect ends G-1, G-2, and G-3 to L6-1, L6-2, and L6-3. 4 Add cable H to the I/O panel by connecting ends H-1, H-2, and H-3 to L7-1, L7-2, and L7-3. —End— Segment 2 Step Action 1 Leave cable K as is in slot L8. 2 Move cable end L-3 to L9-3. 3 Remove cable M from the backplane and connect ends M-1, M-2, and M-3 to L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3.
Upgrading systems 497 —End— Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded to provide one cable for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable arrangement should look like this: Backplane slot-connector I/O panel cable position L0 A L1 B L2 C L3 D (new cable) L4 E L5 F L6 G L7 H (new cable) L8 K L9 L L10 M L11 N (new cable) L12 R L13 S L14 T L15 U (new cable) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.
NT7D16 Data Access card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 499) "Physical description" (page 501) "Functional description" (page 506) "Electrical specifications" (page 519) "Connector pin assignments" (page 524) "Configuration" (page 527) Introduction ATTENTION IMPORTANT! The NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. The NTDK16 digital line card is supported ONLY in the Chassis system.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards NT8D02 Digital Line card The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. You can install this card in any IPE slot. NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Chassis system. It is based on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and is functionally equivalent to three NT8D02s, and configured as cards 4, 5, and 6 in the main chassis.
Physical description 501 The digital line card supports voice only or simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous ASCII terminal, or a PC acting as an asynchronous ASCII terminal, can be connected to the system through the digital telephone. The NT8D02 Digital Line Card provides 16 voice and 16 data communication links.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The faceplate of the NTDK16BA digital line card is equipped with three light emitting diodes (LEDs). A red LED lights when the card is disabled. At power-up, this LED flashes as the digital line card runs a self-test. If the test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out. This LED only shows the status of the NTDK16 in slot 4. Note: The NTDK16AA has one LED. This LED shows the status of Card 4.
Physical description Figure 123 Digital line card - faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 124 Digital line card - faceplate The NT8D02 Digital Line Card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The faceplate of the NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 125 "Digital line card faceplate" (page 505).
Physical description 505 the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card. Figure 125 Digital line card - faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Functional description NT8D02 Digital Line card The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32 addressable ports per card.
Functional description 507 Figure 126 Digital line card - block diagram NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 96 addressable ports per card.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions: • self-identification • self-test • control of card operation • status report to the controller • maintenance diagnostics The card also provides: • Ability to support Digital sets and the Digital Console M2250 • Provides a serial link (Card LAN) for status report and maintenance. • Supports loop lengths up to 3500 ft. (1.0 km) using 24 AWG wire.
Functional description Figure 127 NTDK16 DLC Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 128 Digital line card - block diagram The NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped with 16 identical digital line interfaces. Each interface provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from a digital terminal (telephone) over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz Time Compression Multiplexed (TCM) digital link.
Functional description 511 Figure 129 "NT8D02 Digital Line Card - block diagram" (page 511) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages. Figure 129 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - block diagram Functional description of the NT8D02 The digital line card is equipped with 16 identical units.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32 addressable ports per card.
Functional description 513 The digital line card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in detail in the section "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 21). The NT8D02 Digital Line Card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. Digital line interfaces The digital line interface contains two Digital Line Interface Circuits (DLIC).
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the Call Server and return incoming call status information to the Call Server over the DS-30X network loop.
Functional description 515 The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the Call Processor and return incoming call status information to the Call Processor over the DS-30X network loop.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Each digital telephone line terminates on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface circuit. It also provides battery voltage for the digital telephone.
Functional description 517 — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation — maintenance diagnostics The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card. The digital line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation — maintenance diagnostics The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.
Digital line interface specifications 519 The +15 V dc input is regulated down to +10 V dc for use by the digital line interface circuits. The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power the loop interface circuits. Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 Digital Line card. This section lists the electrical characteristic of the digital line card. This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 Digital Line Card.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Technical summary Table 196 "NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line Card technical summary" (page 520) provides a technical summary of the digital line cards.
Technical summary Characteristics Description Loop limits 0 to 1067 m (3500 ft.) with 24 AWG 521 PVC cable (±15 V dc at 80 mA) Maximum ac Signal loss 15.5 dB at 256 KHz Maximum dc Loop resistance 210 ohms Transmitter output voltage: successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and –1.5 ± 0.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 199 Digital line card-power required Voltage Current (max.) ±5.0 V dc 150 mA +15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp –15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp The digital line card needs +15V DC over each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line feed interface can supply power to one loop of varying length up to 1070 m (3500 ft) using 24 AWG wire with a maximum allowable AC signal loss of 15.
Technical summary 523 Foreign and surge voltage protections In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the NT8D02 Digital Line card. The NT8D02 Digital Line card does, however, have protection against accidental shorts to –52 V dc analog lines. When the card is used to service off-premise telephones, primary and secondary Main Distribution Frame (MDF) protection must be installed.
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 202 Digital line card - environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F) Table 203 "Digital line card - environmental specifications" (page 524) shows the environmental specifications of the card.
Connector pin assignments 525 Table 205 NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip 63A Line 9, Ring
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 206 Digital line card - backplane pinouts Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip 63A Line 9, R
Configuration 527 Table 207 NT8D02 Digital Line Card - backplane pinouts Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip 63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Jumper and switch settings The NT8D02 Digital Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the Call Server through the LAN Link interface. The NT8D02 Digital Line Card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches.
Configuration 529 Figure 131 Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations Voice and data ports are configured using LD 11. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 service change instructions. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 132 Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Configuration NT8D02 Digital Line Card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 133 Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D03 Analog Line card Overview The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the following functions: • control of card operation • card identification • self-test • status reporting to the controller • maintenance diagnostics You can install this card in any IPE slot.
NT8D03 Analog Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 535) "Physical description" (page 538) "Functional description" (page 541) "Connector pin assignments" (page 556) "Configuration" (page 558) Introduction The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an IPE line card that can be installed in the NT8D37 IPE module.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a single-building environment. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card supports 56K modem operation.
Introduction 537 Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a single-building environment. CAUTION Damage to Equipment If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line card, do not define that port in software (LD 10) as having message waiting capabilities. Otherwise, the modem gets damaged.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card is functionally identical to the NT8D03 Analog Line Card, except it can also connect a high-voltage, low-current feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on telephones equipped with the Message Waiting feature. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card supports 56K modem operation.
Physical description 539 Figure 134 Analog message waiting line card - faceplate The analog message waiting line card mounts in any IPE slot. The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The analog message waiting line card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The backplane is cabled to the Input/Output (I/O) panel that then connects to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF), also called a cross-connect terminal through 25-pair cables.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card card through the MDF. SeeCommunication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and cross-connect information. The faceplate of the analog message waiting line card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 134 "Analog message waiting line card - faceplate" (page 539). When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs.
Functional description 541 The faceplate of the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card is equipped with a red LED which lights when the card is disabled. At power-up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Figure 135 "Analog message waiting line card - block diagram" (page 543) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the analog message waiting line card. Each of these functions are described in the following sections. Figure 136 "Analog message waiting line card - block diagram" (page 544) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the analog message waiting line card. Each of these functions are described in the following sections.
Functional description Figure 135 Analog message waiting line card - block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Figure 136 Analog message waiting line card - block diagram • transmission and reception of scan and signaling device (SSD) signaling messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format • on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 545 • 20-Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the station goes off-hook • synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal to zero crossing of ringing voltage • loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals for diagnostic purposes • correct initialization of all features at power-up • direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial pulses • connection of -150 V DC at 1 Hz to activate
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card • connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps • lamp status detection • disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance Card interfaces The analog message waiting line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 21).
Functional description • 547 signaling and control circuits on the analog message waiting line card Microcontroller The analog message waiting line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Power for lighting the message waiting lights is provided by either the peripheral equipment power supply or the ringing generator. Logic on the message waiting line card interrupts the –150 V dc signal at 1 Hz intervals to provide a flashing message waiting light. Technical summary or Electrical specifications Analog line interface The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card meets the EIA/TA464 standard for ONS Type II line cards.
Electrical specifications 549 Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of: • 20 dB for 200-500 Hz • 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of: • 20 dB for 200 – 500 Hz • 26 dB for 500 – 3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is 6 dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 213 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card frequency response Frequency Minimum Maximum 60 Hz 20.0 dB — 200 Hz 0.0 dB 5.0 dB 300 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB 3000 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB 3200 Hz –0.5 dB 1.5 dB 3400 Hz 0.0 dB 3.0 dB Frequency response The loss values in Table 214 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card frequency response" (page 550) are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.
Electrical specifications 551 Ringing voltage 86 V AC Signaling Loop start Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approximately -44.5 V on ring and -2.5 V on tip at nominal -48 V battery) Power input from backplane -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15, -15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analog message waiting line card. Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, 2.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Message channel noise The message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95 percent of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dBmC. Message channel noise The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dBrnC.
Electrical specifications Frequency (Hz) Minimum (dB) Maximum (dB) 3000 –0.5 1.0 3200 –0.5 1.5 3400 0.0 3.0 553 Power requirements Table 219 "Power requirements" (page 553) provides the power requirements for the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card. Table 219 Power requirements Voltage (+/-) Tolerance Idle current Active current + 12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA + 8.0 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA –48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA –48.0 V dc 5.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 220 Analog message waiting line card - power requirements Voltage (+/–) Tolerance Idle current Active current Maximum +12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA +8.5 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA –48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA* 688 mA –48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA** 160 mA 86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 mA*** 160 mA –150.0 V dc 3.
Electrical specifications 555 Table 222 Power requirements Voltage (+/-) Tolerance Idle current Active current Max + 12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA + 8.0 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA –48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA –48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA (Note 1) 320 mA 86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 m (Note 2) 160 mA –150.0 V dc 3.00 V dc 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA Note 1: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Overload level Signal levels exceeding +6.5 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transmission. Overload level Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transmission. Overload level Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transmission.
Connector pin assignments 557 Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the analog message waiting line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 137 "Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example" (page 559) and Table 132 "CLASS modem card - environmental specifications" (page 323) shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane connector.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Configuration This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 138 "Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations" (page 561) shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.
Configuration 559 Figure 137 Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example This transmission profile change is used for control of end-to-end connection loss. Control of such loss is a major element in controlling transmission parameters such as received volume, echo, noise, and crosstalk. The loss plan for the analog message waiting line card determines port-to-port loss between an analog line card unit (port) and other IPE ports.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 226 Transmission Profile Changes Vintage A/D convertor gain D/A convertor gain Previous to AK –3.5 dB –2.5 dB AK and later –3.5 dB –0.5 dB The analog message waiting line card brings the 16 phone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the MDF by 25-pair cables.
Configuration 561 Figure 138 Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations Table 227 Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts Backplane pinout* Lead designations Backplane pinout* Lead designations 12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip 13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip * These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Backplane pinout* Lead designations Backplane pinout* Lead designations 14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip 15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 18B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip 63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip 64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip 65A Line 11, Ring 65B Line 11, Tip 66A Line 12, Rin
Configuration 563 Figure 139 Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example Configuration This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 140 "Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations" (page 565) shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Software service changes Individual line interface units on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card are configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. The message waiting feature is enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions.
Configuration Figure 140 Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 567) "Physical description" (page 571) "Functional description" (page 576) "Operation" (page 585) "Electrical specifications" (page 676) "Connector pin assignments" (page 686) "Configuration" (page 690) "Applications" (page 710) Introduction Nortel is pleased to introduce the NT8D14CA Universal Trunk (XUT) card as a replacement for the NT8D14BB card.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card You can install this card in any IPE slot.In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. Note: Each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion can contain up to four analog trunk cards.
Introduction 569 trunk lines to the Meridian 1 switch. Each trunk interface is independently configurable by software control using the Trunk Administration program LD 14.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion.
Physical description • Tie Two-way Dial Repeating (DR) and Two-way Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) • Paging (PAG) 571 Note: All-call zone paging is not supported. • Recorded Announcement (RAN). The Universal Trunk Card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Table 232 "Supported trunk type and signaling matrix" (page 571) is a matrix of the trunk types and signaling supported by the Universal Trunk Card.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 141 "Universal trunk card - faceplate" (page 573). When an NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is successful, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out.
Physical description Figure 141 Universal trunk card - faceplate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 142 Universal trunk card - faceplate The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 142 "Universal trunk card - faceplate" (page 574). When an NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is successful, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out.
Physical description 575 In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. When the card is installed, the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the faceplate flashes as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out. If the self-test fails, the LED lights steadily and remains lit.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 143 Universal trunk card - faceplate Functional description Figure 144 "NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram" (page 577) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 577 Figure 144 NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram The Universal Trunk Card: • allows trunk type to be configured on a per unit basis • indicates status during an automatic or manual self-test • provides card-identification for auto configuration, and to determine the serial number and firmware level of the card • converts transmission signals from analog-to-digital/digital-to-analog • operates in A-Law or µ-Law companding modes on a per unit basis • provides sof
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card • provides software selected balance impedance (600 ohm or complex impedance network) on a per unit basis • interfaces eight PCM signals to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 format • transmits and receives SSD signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format • supports PCM signal loopback to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes.
Functional description Figure 145 Universal trunk card - block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 146 NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram Card interfaces The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are described in "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 21). Trunk interface units The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains eight identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits).
Functional description 581 Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four trunk interface units.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two CODECs are provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each Codec supports four trunk interface units.
Functional description 583 — programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of trunk interface unit operation — maintenance diagnostics — transmission pad settings The universal trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card — maintenance diagnostics — transmission pad settings The Universal Trunk Card is equipped with a microprocessor which controls card operation. The microprocessor also provides the communication function for the card. The Universal Trunk Card communicates with the Controller Card through a serial communication link.
Operation 585 The signaling and control portion of the Universal Trunk Card works with the CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections. Signaling interface All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Loop start operation Loop start operation is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages. When the card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and ac (ringing) detection. Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages. When the universal trunk card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and AC (ringing) detection.
Operation 587 Figure 147 Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS The alerting signal into the Meridian 1 is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing sent by the CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the Meridian 1 places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 153 "Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 594) and Figure 154 "Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 595).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 148 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS The alerting signal is 20 Hz ringing sent by North American CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the trunk places a low resistance DC loop towards the CO. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 149 Loop start call states - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 150 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call Outgoing calls For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 151 "Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 591) and Figure 152 "Ground start call connection sequence incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 592). When the CO detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits.
Operation 591 to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. Figure 151 Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 152 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS For outgoing calls from the Meridian 1, software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO (see Figure 155 "Loop start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS" (page 596) and Figure 156 "Loop start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS" (page 597)).
Operation 593 is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the Meridian 1 in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 159 "Ground start call states - incoming call" (page 601) and Figure 160 "Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call" (page 602).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 153 Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS The CS 1000 software provides the polarity-sensitive/polarity-insensitive (PSP and PIP) packs feature for the accurate recording of outgoing call duration for loop start and ground start operation.
Operation Figure 154 Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 155 Loop start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 597 Figure 156 Loop start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Ground start operation Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead.
Operation Figure 157 Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 158 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 159 Ground start call states - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 160 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call Reverse-wiring compensation The CS 1000 software includes a feature for detecting reverse wiring (connection of the near-end tip and ring leads to the far-end ring and tip leads) on ground start trunks with far-end answer supervision. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 603 Ordinarily, an incoming call on a reverse-wired trunk without reverse-wiring compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring lead. Since the software expects to see a ground on the tip lead, it interprets the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512 milliseconds, the software assumes a far-end disconnect.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512 milliseconds, software assumes far-end disconnect. This causes the call to be presented to a console loop key and then immediately removed. The reverse-wiring compensation feature operates as follows.
Operation 605 Trunks identified as possibly reverse wired are switched by software to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a call-by-call basis. So if a previously correctly wired trunk becomes reverse wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly reverse wired and the threshold count begins. If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 162 Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired." Once identified as positively reverse wired, the call is presented continuously from the first ring. When a reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented.
Operation 607 Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer. Note 2: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms) disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground detector. Outgoing calls For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 163 Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 609 Figure 164 Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 165 Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 611 Figure 166 Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone. After the tip ground is detected by the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip and ring leads and the ground is removed from the ring.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card DTMF tones. See Figure 167 "Ground start call states - outgoing call" (page 612) and Figure 168 "Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call" (page 613). The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation in this section for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP.
Operation Figure 168 Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 169 Loop start call states - outgoing call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 615 Figure 170 Loop start call connection sequence Direct inward dial operation Incoming calls An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 171 "DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO" (page 617) and Figure 172 "DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO" (page 618). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called party answers, the universal trunk card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low-resistance loop, at which time normal battery and ground are restored at the near-end. This also applies to incoming tie trunk calls from a far-end PBX.
Operation 617 Figure 171 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 172 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 619 Figure 173 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO An incoming call from the CO places a low resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Dial pulses or DTMF signals are then presented from the CO. When the call is presented and the terminating party answers, the Universal Trunk Card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 174 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low resistance loop and normal battery and ground are restored at the system. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 621 Two-way, loop dial repeating, TIE trunk operation Incoming calls In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 175 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 622) and Figure 176 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 623). This causes a current to flow through the battery feed resistors in the trunk circuit.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 175 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 176 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 177 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 625 Figure 178 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 187 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 635) and Figure 188 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 636) on.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card When the called party answers, an answer supervision signal is sent by the software, causing the CS 1000 to reverse battery and ground on the tip and ringleads to the far-end. Far-end disconnect is initiated by opening the loop while the near-end disconnect is initiated by restoring normal battery and ground.
Operation 627 Figure 179 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the near-end hangs up, after recognizing far-end call termination. In an outgoing call configuration, the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is connected to an existing PBX by a tie trunk. See Figure 189 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 637).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (page 637) and Figure 190 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 638) also applies to outgoing calls on a DID trunk. Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the near-end hangs up after recognizing far-end call termination. Figure 180 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.
Operation Figure 181 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 182 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 183 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 184 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 185 DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 186 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 187 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 188 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 189 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 190 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Senderized operation for DID and two-way loop DR trunks Incoming calls If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode: Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) start, as assigned at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14.
Operation 639 Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs after ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs one second later. For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end starts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum). For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or battery/ground reversal) is returned by the System after receipt of the seizure signal.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 191 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 641 Figure 192 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards the office occurs after ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse toward the office occurs one second later. For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or battery/ground reversal) is returned by the Meridian 1 after receipt of the seizure signal. The delay dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure and ends (go signal) 384 ms later. The wink start (stop) signal begins 384 ms after seizure and ends (go signal) 256 ms later. The far-end detecting the go signal may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 55 ms, minimum).
Operation 643 The operation represented in Figure 196 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX from a CO" (page 647) also applies to incoming calls on a DID trunk from a CO. Outgoing calls When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal from the far-end so that the near-end cannot outpulse until the far-end is ready to receive digits.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 193 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 645 Figure 194 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 195 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiration of end-of-dial timer. Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 196 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX from a CO Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 197 Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation Incoming calls When the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Addressing is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF tones. The trunk is released at the far-end when the loop is opened.
Operation 649 See Figure 198 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 650) and Figure 199 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 651). When the universal trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Addressing is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF tones.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 198 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.
Operation Figure 199 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 200 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places the battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.
Operation Figure 201 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 202 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the Universal Trunk places battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far end of the seizure. The far end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 203 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 204 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 205 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 206 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 207 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 208 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 661 Figure 209 Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX Recorded announcement trunk operation Note: Refer to "Multi-Channel RAN modes" (page 671) for information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit is connected to a customer-provided recorded announcement machine. Announcement machines must be compatible with RAN trunks.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card • selectable termination of tip and ring leads into 600 or 900 ohms for interface with a low-impedance (2 or 4 ohms) source • connection of up to 24 trunk units to a single announcement machine channel Note: Refer to "Multi-Channel RAN modes" (page 671) for information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk.
Operation 663 Recorded announcement machines Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally, although some drum and tape units are still in service. An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each channel may be prerecorded with a different message.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 210 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally, although some drum and tape units are still in service. An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each channel can be prerecorded with a different message.
Operation 665 Figure 211 "Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)" (page 666) shows a typical connection from a single announcement machine channel to unit 0 on a universal trunk card installed in slot 0 in an NT8D37 IPE Module. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for trunk wiring information.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 211 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) RAN modes of operation Figure 212 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 668) shows the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in Figure 212 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 668) are typical.
Operation 667 Note 2: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled to a single announcer channel. Figure 213 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 669) shows the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in the figure are typical.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 212 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 213 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 214 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) Note 1: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer B line only, and ground the announcer ST+ line. For pulse start or level start modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer ST+ line only, and leave the announcer B line unconnected. Note 2: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled to a single announcer channel.
Operation 671 Multi-Channel RAN modes In Multi-Channel RAN, multiple RAN channels can be configured within one RAN trunk route. In a Multi-Channel RAN route, each trunk has its own dedicated RAN channel on a physical RAN machine. Multi-Channel RAN routes do not support the cross connecting (daisy chains) of multiple trunk ports together so that several callers hear the same RAN message.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card For the RAN machine types, the maximum length of the recorded announcement is two hours. The meaning of a ground signal received from the RAN machine (play or idle) is configured in LD 16. Multi-Channel Level Start/Control Mode (minimum vintage BA) A RAN mode of operation is available called "Multi-Channel Level Start/Control Mode.
Operation 673 The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in Multi-Channel Level Start/Control mode, using the following response: RTYP = MLSS. Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14. Refer to "Programming RAN trunks" (page 675) and to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on service change programs.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 670). At the end of each message, a pulse is issued on the "C" line that is used by the trunk unit to cut through to the waiting call. Note: The "B" (busy) signal line indicates availability of an announcement machine message to the trunk unit when configured for the continuous operation mode.
Operation 675 In the pulse start mode, a start pulse activates playback of a message that continues until completion. The announcement machine ignores all other start pulses that might occur until the message is complete. In the level start mode, the start signal is a "level" rather than a pulse. The leading edge of the start signal initiates message playback that continues until either the trailing edge of the start signal occurs or the end of the message is reached.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on service change programs.The type of intercept and the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the Trunk Administration LD 14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and Trunk Route Administration LD 16 programs.
Electrical specifications 677 Table 233 Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600/900 ohms (Note 1) 600 ohms Balance impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2) 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2) N/A N/A Supervision type Ground or loop start (Note 3) Loop start (with ans sup) (Note 3) Continuous, level
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A Note 1: Selected in software. Note 2: Selected by jumper strap settings on card.
Electrical specifications Characteristic CO/FX/WATS trunks Ground potential difference ±3 V Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing <300 ohms High DC loop resistanceŠŠŠŠ Ground start Š 30k ohms; loop start Š 5M ohms DID or TIE trunks RAN trunks Paging trunks ±1 V ±1 V N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Ring detection 17 to 33 Hz 40 to 120 N/A V rms N/A N/A Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-t
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card CO/FX/WATS trunks DID or tie trunks RAN trunks Paging trunks DC signaling loop length (max) 1700-ohms loop with near-end battery of –42.75 V 2450-ohms loop with near-end battery of –44 V 600/ 900-ohms loop 600 ohms loop Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V (Note 4) –42 to –52.
Electrical specifications Characteristic DID trunk CO trunk Signaling type Loop start Ground or loop start Far end battery - 42 to - 52.5 V - 42 to - 52.5 V Near end battery N/A - 42.75 to - 52.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) +8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA –48.0 V dc ±5% 415 mA Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is provided by the module power supply (ac or dc). Table 239 Power requirements for universal trunk card Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) +15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA –15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA +5.0 V dc ±5% 750 mA +8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA –48.
Electrical specifications 683 Environmental specifications Table 241 "Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card" (page 683) lists the environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 244 Environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating temperature 0 to 50 degrees C, ambient Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature - 40 to + 70 degrees C Release control Release control establishes which end of a call (near, far, either, joint, or originating) disconnects the call. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start configuration can provide disconnect supervision.
Electrical specifications 685 Table 245 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class-of-service (COS) you assign in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Transmission properties may be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss (non-VNL).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card In Option 11C systems, the insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows. Table 246 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) Connector pin assignments The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. Telephone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin connector.
Connector pin assignments 687 Signal Trunk Number Backplane Pin RAN mode Paging mode 2 16A Tip 17A 3 4 5 6 7 Signal Other modes Backplane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes Tip Tip 16B Ring Ring Ring CP A N/A 17B MB RG N/A 18A Tip Tip Tip 18B Ring Ring Ring 19A CP A N/A 19B MB RG N/A 62A Tip Tip Tip 62B Ring Ring Ring 63A CP A N/A 63B MB RG N/A 64A Tip Tip Tip 64B Ring Ring Ring 65A CP A N/A 65B MB RG N/A 66A Tip Tip Tip
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 248 Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts Signal Signal Trunk Number Backplane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes Back-pl ane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes 0 12A Tip Tip Tip 12B Ring Ring Ring 13A CP A N/A 13B MB RG N/A 14A Tip Tip Tip 14B Ring Ring Ring 15A CP A N/A 15B MB RG N/A 16A Tip Tip Tip 16B Ring Ring Ring 17A CP A N/A 17B MB RG N/A 18A Tip Tip Tip 18B Ring Ring Ring 19A CP A N/A
Connector pin assignments 689 Trunk Number 5 6 7 Signal Backplane Pin RAN mode Paging mode 63A CP 64A Other modes RAN mode Paging mode Other modes A N/A 63B MB RG N/A Tip Tip Tip 64B Ring Ring Ring 65A CP A N/A 65B MB RG N/A 66A Tip Tip Tip 66B Ring Ring Ring 67A CP A N/A 67B MB RG N/A 68A Tip Tip Tip 68B Ring Ring Ring 69A CP A N/A 69B MB RG N/A Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 215 Universal trunk card - typical cross connect example Configuration The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configuration is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. NT8D14 has a reduced jumper strap setting on the card. There are only three jumpers, J1.X, J2.X, and J3.X on each channel.
Configuration 691 NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 692), and Table 252 "Trunk types termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 692) show the functionality of these three jumpers. Table 250 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS 0–1524 m (5000 ft.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 251 Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length J3.X CO/FX/WATS > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
Configuration Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) RAN: continuous operation mode Paging 693 Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 251 "Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 692), for the following: • For CO/FX/WATS or TIE trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.
Configuration 695 Figure 216 Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below For most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 255 "Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 698). For CO/FX/WATS or tie trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page 698). Figure 218 "Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below" (page 702) shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA). Service change entries The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14.
Configuration Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) RAN: continuous operation mode Paging 697 Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 600 or 900 hms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 255 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS 0–1524m (5000ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2 RAN: continuous operation mode Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) Paging Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
Configuration 699 Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J4.X (Note 2) Trunk types Loop length J3.X DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Note 2: For the NT8D14BB Release 10 or later card, J4.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Terminating impedance (Note 1) Trunk types Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 600 DID (loop length < 600 ohms) or 900 ohms DID (loop length Š 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms N/A 3CM2 RAN: continuous operation mode 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software sele
Configuration 701 resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths are given in Table 258 "Cable loop resistance and loss" (page 700) for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements. Figure 217 Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BB Release 10 and higher Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 218 Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Configuration 703 Table 259 Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2 RAN: continuous operation mode Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 1–2 1–2 Trunk types CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) Paging Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 260 Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and later) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 Trunk types CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.
Configuration Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) RAN: continuous operation mode Paging 705 Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A Note: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) response. Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks.
Configuration 707 • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) response. Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as TIE trunks.
Configuration Port B pads Universal Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB) Universal trunk card to Port B Transmit D to A Receive A to D Transmi D to A Receive A to D Port B to Universal trunk card PE CO/FX/WATS (TRC) Out Out In In 1 1 PE TIE Out Out In In 0.5 0.5 Port B 709 Note 1: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1. Transmit is from the Meridian 1 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the Universal trunk card).
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card See Table 264 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 708) for the pad switching control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card and any other port designated as Port B.
Applications 711 in a Media Gateway Expansion. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for trunk wiring information. Figure 220 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk. Configure units as paging trunks in the Trunk Administration program LD 14 and assign routes in the Route Administration program LD 16.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card In the Paging mode, the Universal Trunk is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and B. In a typical application, it transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the trunk. A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk.
Applications 713 Figure 221 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF.A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms.
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 222 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF. A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 715) "Physical description" (page 719) "Functional description" (page 723) "Operation" (page 747) "Electrical specifications" (page 772) "Connector pin assignments" (page 776) "Configuration" (page 784) "Applications" (page 795) Introduction The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card interfaces four analog telephone trunks to the switch.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • 4-wire E and M Trunks: — Type I or Type II signaling — duplex (DX) signaling • paging (PAG) trunks Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use Type II signaling. Table 266 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 716) lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the NT8D15 E and M Trunk card.
Introduction 717 Type I signaling utilizes two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX signaling utilizes two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use Type II signaling. Table 267 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 717) lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the E and M Trunk card.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 268 Trunk and signaling matrix Trunk types Signaling RLM/RLR Tie PAG CSA/CAA/CAM 2-wire E and M Yes Yes Yes Yes 4-wire E and M Yes Yes No Yes Note: Yes for 11C and 11C mini.
Physical description 719 Table 269 Supported trunk and signaling matrix Signaling RLM RLR ATV TIE PAG CSA CAA CAM 2-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes 4-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes Physical description The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E and M Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card The E and M Trunk card mounts in any IPE slot. The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E and M Trunk card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.
Physical description 721 Figure 223 E and M Trunk card - faceplate The E and M Trunk card mounts in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion. The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card The E and M Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin connector. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards.
Functional description 723 Figure 224 E and M Trunk card - faceplate Functional description The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 225 "E and M Trunk card - block diagram" (page 725) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the E and M Trunk card. Each of these functions is discussed on the following pages. The NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries.
Functional description 725 Figure 225 E and M Trunk card - block diagram • Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate Light Emitting Diode (LED). • Supports loopback of PCM signals to DS30X for diagnostic purposes. • Card ID provided for auto configuration and determining serial number and firmware level of card. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 226 E and M Trunk card - block diagram • Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm) two and four-wire modes. • Allows trunk type to be configured on a per port basis in software. • Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 727 Figure 227 E and M Trunk card - block diagram • Isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit. • Software control of A/µ-Law mode. • Software control of digit collection.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • Ability to enable and disable individual ports or the entire card under software control • Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in software and down loaded at power up and by software commands.
Functional description 729 • provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire facility connections • enable trunk type and function to be configured on a per-port basis in software • provide isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit • provide software control of A-Law and µ-Law modes • support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes The E and M Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card The E and M Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. The E and M Trunk card contains four identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk.
Functional description • 731 Four-wire E and M signaling type I and II, two-way dial repeating (ESN and Non-ESN) — echo suppression for type I — Switchable seven dB and 16 dB for carrier interface for ESN applications — Transmit and receive of voice through two separate paths • Type I signaling through E and M leads — Type II signaling • – Near-end seizure with MA/MB leads – Far-end detection with EA/EB leads Paging trunk loop OAID operation — Support access by low resistance path at the PA/PB le
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • paging trunk operation (see Figure 231 "Paging trunk operation" (page 735)) with support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads Note: Paging end-to-end signaling is not supported. Figure 228 E and M Type I signaling Figure 229 E and M Type II signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 733 The functions provided by each unit on the E and M Trunk card include 2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operation as follows: • 2-wire, E and M Type I signaling (see Figure 232 "E and M Type I signaling" (page 736)) with: — near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — ground detection with E lead — voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive • 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling (see Figure 233 "E and M Type II signaling" (page 737)), 2-
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 230 4-wire DX signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 735 Figure 231 Paging trunk operation — Type I signaling through E and M leads — Type II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end detection by E/SG leads • 4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 234 "4-wire DX signaling" (page 738)) • paging trunk operation (see Figure 235 "Paging trunk operation" (page 739)) with: — support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads — paging end-to-end signaling not supported The functions provided by each unit on the E and M
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 232 E and M Type I signaling — near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — ground detection with E lead — voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive • 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling, 2-way dial repeating with: — echo suppression for Type I signaling — switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface — voice transmission and reception through two separate paths — Type I signaling through E and M leads — Type II signaling with near-en
Functional description Figure 233 E and M Type II signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 234 4-wire DX signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description Figure 235 Paging trunk operation Figure 236 E and M Type I signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 237 4-wire DX signaling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 741 Figure 238 Paging trunk operation Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card. Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial communication link to the NT8D01 Controller Card. The microcontroller provides the following functions: • card-identification • self-test • control of card operation • status report to the controller • maintenance diagnostics The E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card.
Functional description 743 The card LAN provides a serial communication link for transferring maintenance data and control signals between the trunk card and the SSC card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller. The following functions are supported: • providing card ID/RLS • reporting self-test status • enabling/disabling of the DS-30X link The Card Lan interface supports maintenance functions.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Signaling and control The signaling and control portion of the E and M Trunk card works with the system CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card provides analog loop terminations that establish, supervise, and take down call connections.
Functional description 745 units to configure trunk and signaling type. The remaining three messages are sent per card to select the make/break ratio and the A-Law and µ-Law modes.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • decode received messages to set configuration and activate/deactivate interface relays for PCM loopback diagnostic purposes • decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive outpulsing relays at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primary), or 10 pps2 (secondary) • monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when required for each state change • control disabling and enabling of unit or card • control A-Law and Mu-Law operation modes • control tr
Operation • 747 card ID for autoconfiguration and determination of serial number and firmware level The following features are provided for maintenance of the E and M Trunk: • indication of card status from self-test • software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card • loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes • card ID for autoconfiguration and to determine the serial number and firmware level of the card The following features are provided for maintena
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 239 Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of E and M Type I and II trunks. The call is terminated and the trunk released by a disconnect message sent to the associated unit.
Operation 749 Figure 248 "E and M type signaling patterns - originating party release" (page 766) shows E and M Type I signaling patterns for incoming and outgoing calls. Figure 249 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection" (page 767) shows Type I signaling patterns on a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (not applicable to CCSA).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 240 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 751 Figure 241 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection — If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection). Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery. — If answer supervision is provided by the far-end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 242 Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery. — If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 243 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 244 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Incoming calls The far-end initiates calls as follows: • The ground is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling. • Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation • 755 If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system can operate in any mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a start arrangement basis. See Table 270 "Operation Mode" (page 755). — In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called office. The seizure signal (off hook supervisory state) from the far-end should be at least 150 ms. At the end of the seizure signal, the far-end can start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card — In wink start mode, within a 128–256 ms period after receipt of the seizure signal from the far-end, the called office transmits a 250 ms, wink start, off hook/on hook signal to the calling office. Table 271 Operation mode Operation mode Start arrangement Immediate start IMM Delay dial DDL Wink start WNK The far-end initiates calls as follows: • The ground is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling.
Operation 757 E and M Type II signaling Figure 245 "E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release" (page 758) shows E and M Type II signaling patterns for incoming and outgoing calls. Figure 246 "E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection" (page 759) shows Type II signaling patterns for a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in the route data block (LD 16). Disconnect supervision is specified for each trunk group independently. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start configuration can provide disconnect supervision. For a list of prompts and responses and default conditions see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).
Operation Figure 246 E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Duplex signaling Duplex (DX) signaling makes use of the voice transmission leads for signaling as well as for voice transmission. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card For descriptive purposes, the lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the signaling pair. The other pair Tip A/Ring A conducts current in the opposite direction to balance the overall current flow between the near and far ends. During signaling, current flows through both Tip B and Ring B leads in the same direction.
Operation Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High 761 Table 275 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Idle No current flow High Seizure (far-end ready for digits) Current flow High Dial CO/FX/WATS
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector If answer supervision: pseudo-answer supervision is sent approximately 13 seconds after last dial pulse received No current flow Low If no answer supervision: CO end disconnects (if a CO ground start – the trunk is idled and network taken down, but the incoming TIE trunk is held under control of the originating end) Current flow Low Originating end disconnects – network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High
Operation Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Far-end answers No current flow Low Far-end on hook first Current flow High Network taken down and trunk idled when near-end goes on hook No current flow High Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High Condition 763 Table 278 DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release Condition Current in s
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Outpulsed No current flow Low Far end answers No current flow Low Far end on hook first Current flow High Near end on hook, network taken down, trunk idled No current flow High Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low Far end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High Condition Table 280 DX signaling - incoming calls w
Operation Figure 247 Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 248 E and M type signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation Figure 249 E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 250 E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Operation 769 Figure 251 E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection Table 277 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release" (page 762) and Table 278 "DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release" (page 763) show call-connection and take-down sequencing for DX signaling.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 281 DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Idle No current flow High Seizure (dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits) Current flow High Digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Far-end answers No current flow Low Far-end on hook first Current flow High Network taken down and trunk idled when near-end goes on hook No current flow High Near-end on hook
Operation Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Stop sender No current flow Low Go sender (universal service provided by far-end Current flow PBX if originating end is senderized) 771 High CO/FX/WATS offices ready for digits Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse High Outpulsed No current flow Low Far-end answers No current flow Low Far-end on hook first Current flow High Near-end on hook, network taken down, trunk idled No current flow
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical specifications for the E and M Trunk card. This section lists the electrical specifications for the E and M Trunk card. The electrical characteristics of all trunk circuits are provided in Table 286 "Electrical characteristics of trunk cards" (page 772). Table 285 "Electrical characteristics of E and M Trunk cards" (page 772) lists the electrical characteristics of the trunk interface on the E and M Trunk card.
Electrical specifications 773 Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing N/A 300 ohms High DC loop resistance N/A Ground start equal to or greater than 30 kS. Loop start equal to or greater than 5 MS Line leakage Equal to or greater than 30 kS (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND, Ring to GND).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V dc –42 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.
Electrical specifications 775 Table 291 Power requirements Voltage Tolerance Max current +15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA –15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA +8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA –48.0 V dc ±5 % 415 mA Power requirements for the NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card are specified in Table 292 "Power requirements" (page 775). Table 292 Power requirements Voltage Tolerance Idle Current Active Current +/- 15.0 V DC +/- 5% 200mA 200 mA + 8.5 V DC +/- 2% 200 mA 200 mA - 48.0 V DC +/- 5% 415 mA 415 mA +5.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Parameter Specifications Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (noncondensing) Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C (–40 to +158 degrees F) Table 295 Environmental specifications Parameter Specifications Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C (–40 to +158 degrees F) Environmental specifications are provided in Table 296 "Environmental specifications" (page 776).
Connector pin assignments 777 Telephone trunks connect to the E and M Trunk card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 252 "E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example" (page 779). A list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table 297 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes" (page 777).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 16B TA 16A TB 16B TA 16A TB 17B RA 17A RB 17B RA 17A RB 18B E 18A M 18B EA 18A EB 19B ECG 19A ESCG 19B MA 19A MB 62B TA 62A TB 62B TA 62A TB 63B RA 63A RB 63B RA 63A RB 64B E 64A M 64B EA 64A EB 65B ECG 65A ESCG 65B MA 65A MB 66B TA 66A TB 66B TA 66A TB 67B RA 67A RB 67B RA 67A RB 68B E 6
Connector pin assignments 779 Figure 252 E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example A typical connection example is shown in Figure 253 "E and M Trunk card typical cross connection example" (page 782); a list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table 299 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes" (page 780); and a list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 4-wire modes is shown in Table 300 "E and M Trunk card
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 299 E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring 15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring 19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring 65B A 65A PG 64B E 64A M 66B Tip 66A Ring 66B Tip 66A Ring 69B A 69A PG 48B E 68A M 1 2 3
Connector pin assignments 781 The E and M Trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back of the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion using a 25-pin connector. Telephone trunks connect to the E and M Trunk card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 253 "E and M Trunk card typical cross connection example" (page 782).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 253 E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Connector pin assignments 783 Figure 254 E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example Table 301 E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring 15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring 19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring 65B A 65A PG 64B E 64A M 1 2 Nortel Com
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 3 66B Tip 66A Ring 66B Tip 66A Ring 69B A 69A PG 48B E 68A M Table 302 E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes 4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B TA 12A TB 12B TA 12A TB 13B RA 13A RB 13B RA 13A RB 14B E 14A M 14B EA 14A EB 15B ECG 15A
Configuration 785 Each of the four trunk circuits on the E and M trunk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and configuration software service entries. The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 255 "E and M Trunk card jumper locations" (page 786).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 255 E and M Trunk card - jumper locations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Configuration 787 Table 303 E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X Off Off Off Off On On J7.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Table 304 E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X Off Off Off Off On On J7.
Configuration 789 Table 305 E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X Off Off Off Off On On J7.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in the Route Data Block Program LD 16. The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Data Block Program (LD 14). Refer to Table 304 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings" (page 788) to select the proper values for the trunk type being employed. Refer to the Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 14 and LD 16 service change instructions.
Configuration 791 See Table 306 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 791) for the pad switching control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the E and M Trunk card and any other IPE port designated as Port B. Figure 256 "Pad orientation" (page 791) shows the pad switching orientation.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Note: Facilities associated with the Nortel Networks Electronic Switched Network (ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire for optimum transmission; so the 4-wire setting is generally referred to as the ESN setting. However, the 4-wire setting is not restricted to networks using the ESN feature. Conversely, the 2-wire setting, often called non-ESN, can be used on certain trunks in an ESN environment.
Configuration Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads 793 Port-to-port loss (dB) Transmit D to A Receive A to D Transmit D to A Receive A to D Port B to E and M E and M to Port B Out Out In In 0 0 In Out In Out 0 0 PE line N/A N/A Out In 3.0 4.0 PE CO/FX/W ATS (TRC) Out Out In In 0 0 PE TIE Out Out In In 0 0 Port B Universal trunk (TRC) IPE TIE (VNL) Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card • Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user. The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss (VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL). The VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing VNL.
Applications Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads 795 Port-to-port loss (dB) Transmit D to A Receive A to D Transmit D to A Receive A to D Port B to E and M E and M to Port B PE CO/FX/W ATS (TRC) Out Out In In 0 0 PE tie Out Out In In 0 0 Port B Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the CS 1000. Transmit is from the CS 1000 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E and M Trunk card).
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the switchable pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a four-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB or when impedance compensation is not provided.
Applications 797 The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the switchable pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a four-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB or when impedance compensation is not provided.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card control leads PG and A. See Figure 259 "Paging trunk operation" (page 798). In a typical application, this transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the trunk. Figure 259 Paging trunk operation When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system (not zone selectable). When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant-key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads PG and A1.
Applications 799 When used in the Paging mode the trunk circuit is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by dial up or attendant key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and B. In a typical application, it transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the Trunk. Figure 260 Paging trunk operation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card Figure 261 Paging trunk operation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 801) "Physical description" (page 802) "Functional description" (page 803) "Connector pin assignments" (page 805) "Configuring the SDI paddle board" (page 805) "Applications" (page 809) Introduction The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface (SDI) paddle board provides two RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between the system and two external devices.
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 262 "NT8D41AA SDI paddle board" (page 803).
Functional description 803 Figure 262 NT8D41AA SDI paddle board Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board paddle board block diagram" (page 804). Other logic on the card includes two baud rate generators, two RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure the UARTs. Figure 263 NT8D41AA SDI paddle board block diagram System considerations In dual-processor systems, the SDI paddle board behaves differently depending on which backplane socket it is installed in.
Configuring the SDI paddle board 805 terminal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without affecting the operation of the switch. Connector pin assignments The RS-232-C signals for port 1 are brought out on connector J1 and the RS-232-C signals for port 2 are brought out on connector J2. The pinouts of J1 and J2 are identical, so Table 311 "Connectors J1 and J2 pin assignments" (page 805) can be used for both ports.
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in "Software service changes" (page 808)". Option switch settings Address Address select switch SW4 and logic on the card always address the two UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The settings for this switch are shown in Table 312 "SDI paddle board address switch settings" (page 806).
Configuring the SDI paddle board 807 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions for setting the switches SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are shown in Table 314 "NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings" (page 807).
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 264 SDI paddle board option switch locations Software service changes Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).
Applications 809 Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17, are shown in "LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters." (page 809). These parameters must be set for each port if both ports are being used. LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters.
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board between the Meridian 1 system and two external devices. The SDI paddle board is usually used to connect the Meridian 1 system to the system administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution ( ACD) or Call Detail Recording ( CDR) features.
Physical description 811 The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 266 "NT8D41AA SDI paddle board" (page 812). Up to two paddle boards can be used in a system backplane for a total of four serial ports.
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 266 NT8D41AA SDI paddle board Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the Meridian 1 system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.
Functional description 813 paddle board block diagram" (page 813). Other logic on the card includes two baud rate generators, two RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure the UARTs. Figure 267 NT8D41AA SDI paddle board block diagram System considerations In dual-processor Meridian 1 systems, the SDI paddle board behaves differently depending on which backplane socket it is installed in.
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board the maintenance terminal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without affecting the operation of the switch. Connector pin assignments The RS-232-C signals for port 1 are brought out on connector J1 and the RS-232-C signals for port 2 are brought out on connector J2.
Configuring the SDI paddle board 815 Configuring the SDI paddle board Configuring the SDI paddle board to work in a Meridian 1 system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Port address • Baud rate • DTE/DCE/Fiber mode The SDI paddle board has seven option switches, SW 2–8. Figure 268 "SDI paddle board option switch locations" (page 817) identifies the location of option switches on the SDI paddle board.
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 317 SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings Port 1 – SW2 Port 2 – SW3 Baud rate 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 150 off off on on off off on on 300 off on off on off on off on 600 off off off on off off off on 1200 off on on off off on on off 2400 off off on off off off on off 4800 off on off off off on off off 9600 off off off off off off off off DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be conf
Configuring the SDI paddle board 817 Figure 268 SDI paddle board option switch locations Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17, are shown in Table 319 "Serial port configuration parameters" (page 818). These parameters must be set for each port if both ports are being used. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 319 Serial port configuration parameters Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change configuration. TYPE CFN Configuration type. IOTB YES Change input/output devices. ADAN NEW TTY x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x = 0 to 15. New PRT x CDNO 1–16 Use the SDI paddle board number to keep track of all ports. DENS DDEN Double density SDI paddle board. USER xxx Enter the user of port x.
Applications Figure 269 SDI paddle board cabling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 821) "Physical description" (page 822) "Functional description" (page 822) "Connector pin assignments" (page 824) "Configuring the QSDI paddle board" (page 825) "Applications" (page 828) Introduction The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) paddle board provides four RS-232-C serial ports.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 270 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board" (page 823).
Functional description 823 Figure 270 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each UART. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 271 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram System considerations For CS 1000 4.5 and 5.0, in dual-processor systems, the 2 card slots on the back of a CoreNet shelf supporting CP PII and CP PIV function regardless of which CPU is active. On Release 5.0 only the CP PII and CP PIV are supported. In Options 61C and 81C, CS 1000SG, and CS 1000MG, four NT8D41BB can be provisioned for a total of 16 SDI ports.
Configuring the QSDI paddle board 825 Table 320 Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 DCD Data Carrier detect (Note 1) Data Carrier detect (Not used) 2 RD Transmitted data Received data 3 TD Received data Transmitted data 4 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2) 5 GND Signal Ground Signal Ground 6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready 7 RTS Request to send (Not Used) Request to send (Note 2) 8
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 321 NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 1 2 3 4 150 2.40 on off on on 300 4.80 on on off on 600 9.60 on off off on 1,200 19.20 on on on off 2,400 38.40 on off on off 4,800 76.80 on on off off 9,600 153.60 on off off off 19,200* 307.20 on on on on * For future use.
Configuring the QSDI paddle board 827 Table 323 NT8D41BA address switch settings SW15 Port 1 Port 2 SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 E X off off off off off off 2 3 E X off off off off off on 4 5 E X off off off off on off 6 7 E X off off off off on on 8 9 E X off off off on off off 10 11 E X off off off on off on 12 13 E X off off off on on off 14 15 E X off off off on on on Device pair addresses Swit
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Port 1 — SW 3 Mode NT1P61 (Fiber) Port 1 — SW 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 on on on on on off on on on off on off Port 4 — SW 9 Port 4 — SW 8 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off on on on off on off Software service changes Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been installed in the
Applications 829 The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance. Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 272 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.).
Physical description 831 The QSDI paddle board can be used in a system backplane for a total of four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging standard serial cards into standard system slots. The serial ports on the card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, up to 14 and 15), using switches SW15 and SW16. The front edge of the card has four serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable switch (ENB/DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates the card status.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 273 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board Functional description The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has four asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the Meridian 1 system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
Functional description 833 The QSDI paddle board design contains four Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 274 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram" (page 833). Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each UART.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board The QSDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at midnight and whenever a fault occurs on the active CPU card. The QSDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane (supported in NT6D39AA shelves only).
Configuring the QSDI paddle board Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode Signal Ground Signal Ground 5 G N D 6 D Data set ready (Note 1) S R Data set ready 7 R Request to send (Not Used) T S Request to send (Note 2) 8 C Clear to send (Note 1) T S Clear to send 835 Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 327 NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 150 SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) 1 2 3 4 2.40 on off on on 300 4.80 on on off on 600 9.60 on off off on 1,200 19.20 on on on off 2,400 38.40 on off on off 4,800 76.80 on on off off 9,600 153.60 on off off off 19,200* 307.20 on on on on * For future use.
Configuring the QSDI paddle board Port 1 SW15 SW16 Port 2 837 Switch settings 3 4 5 6 7 8 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 12 13 E X off off off on on off 14 15 E X off off off on on on * To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Port 1 — SW 3 Mode Port 1 —SW 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (terminal) o n o n o n o ff o n o ff o ff o n o ff o n o ff o n DCE (modem) o ff o ff o ff o n o ff o n o n o ff o n o ff o n o ff NT1P61 (Fiber) o n o n o n o n o n o ff o n o n o n o ff o n o ff Software service changes Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recogn
Applications Figure 275 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTAG26 XMFR card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 841) "MF signaling" (page 841) "Physical specifications" (page 844) Introduction The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF digit information. Connections are made between a PBX and a central office. The XMFR card can only operate in systems using µ-law companding. You can install this card in any IPE slot.
NTAG26 XMFR card Digit Backward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz 8 900 Hz +1500 Hz 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz 0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz ST2P(ST") 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz ST3P(ST") 700 Hz + 1700 Hz XMFR receiver specifications Table 331 "XMFR receiver specifications" (page 842) provides the operating requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card.
Introduction Noise Rejection: Error Rate in White Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -20 dB all digits Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -12 dBs all digits ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB 56201 Error Rate from Power Lines Tolerate Intermodulation: 843 Better than: < 1/2500 calls Te
NTAG26 XMFR card Physical specifications The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in Table 332 "Physical specifications" (page 844). Introduction Table 332 Physical specifications Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled Power requirements 1.
MF signaling Digit Backward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz 0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz ST2P(ST") 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz ST3P(ST") 700 Hz + 1700 Hz 845 XMFR receiver specifications Table 334 "XMFR receiver specifications" (page 845) provides the operating requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card.
NTAG26 XMFR card Immunity to Impulse Noise Error Rate from Power Lines Tolerate Intermodulation: Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -12 dBs all digits ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB 56201 Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms 60 Hz signal @ 81 dBrnc0 (-9dBm) or 180 Hz signal @ 68 dBrnco (-22dBm) all digits Must tolerate @
Physical specifications Table 335 Physical specifications Dimensions Faceplate LED Power requirements Environmental considerations Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Lit when the circuit card is disabled 1.1 Amps typical Meets the environment of Meridian 1 systems Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTAG26 XMFR card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 849) "NTAK02 SDI/DCH card" (page 849) Introduction The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. It is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH cards are supported in a Media Gateway.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Table 337 Switch settings Port 0 Port 1 SW 1-1 SW 1-2 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U.K. Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 851 Table 339 NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal RS232 Cable Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE 1T 1R W-BL BL-W 0 DTR 0 DCD — O — I 2T 2R W-O O-W DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O 3T 3R W-G G-W RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O 4T 4R W-BR BR-W RX TX TX RX I O O I 5T 5R W-S S-W — SG — SG — — — — Table 340 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1 RS422 Cable RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Signal
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card RS422 Cable RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 12T 12R BK-O O-BK RXDB TXDB TXDB RXDB I O O I — — — — — — — — 25T 25R V-S S-V SG — SG — — — — — — — — — SG — SG — Table 341 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2 RS422 Cable Pair Color 13T 13R Designations I=Input O=Output Signal DTE RS232 DCE Designations I=Input O=Output Signal DTE
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card RS422 Cable RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 20T 20R Y-S S-Y RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O O I I O RTS CTS CTS RTS 21T 21R V-BL BL-V SCRA SCTA SCTEA RXCA I I O O I I O O SCR SCT SCT — 22T 22R V-O O-V SCRB SCTB SCTEB RXCB I I O O — — — — — — — — 23T 23R V-G G-V RXDA TXDA TXDA RXDA I O O I I O O I RXD TXD TXD RXD 24T 24R V-BR BR-V RXDB TXDB TXDB RX
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card • Data bit: Transparent (1) • Duplex: Full • Clock: Internal or external • Interface: RS-232-D, RS-422-A Introduction The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel. Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH cards are supported in a Media Gateway. The NTAK02 SDI/DCH card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON — ESDI ON ON 855 Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U.K. Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. Table 345 "Jumper settings" (page 855) shows the jumper settings.
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card RS232 Cable Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE 2T 2R W-O O-W DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O 3T 3R W-G G-W RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O 4T 4R W-BR BR-W RX TX TX RX I O O I 5T 5R W-S S-W — SG — SG — — — — Table 347 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1 RS422 Cabl e RS232 Designations I=I nput O=Output Signal Designations I=Input O=O utput Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 5T 5R W-S S-W SC
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 857 Table 348 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2 RS422 Cabl e Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color 13T 13R DTE RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Signal DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE BK-G G-BK — — — — — O — I — DTR — DCD 14T 14R BK-BR BR-BK — — — — I I O O DSR DCD CH/CI DTR 15T 15R BK-S S-BK — — — — O I I O RTS CTS CTS RTS 16T 16R Y-BL BL-Y — — — — I O O I RX TX TXD RXD 17T 17R Y-O O-Y O — I — O — I — — SG
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card RS422 Cabl e RS232 Designatio ns I=Input O=Output Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 24T 24R V-BR BR-V RXDB TXDB TXDB RXDB I O O I — — — — — — — — 25T 25R V-S S-V — SG — SG — — — — — — — — SG — SG — Characteristics of the low speed port Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and from the line one bit at a time.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 859) "Physical description" (page 860) "Functional description" (page 867) "Architecture" (page 869) Introduction The NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI digital trunk card is a standard-size IPE circuit card. The NTAK09 provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The NTAK09 is a standard-size intelligent peripheral equipment circuit card in the Option 11C main and IP expansion cabinets. It provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability. The NTAK09 can be equipped with two daughterboards: the NTAK20 clock controller and the NTAK93/NTBK51 D-Channel handler interface. The NTAK09 is being replaced by the NTRB21 - TMDI (DTI/PRI/DCH) which is described in "NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card" (page 1053).
Physical description 861 Figure 276 NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. The first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash three times and then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 350 "NTAK09 LED states" (page 861).
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card LED RED YEL LBK State Definition Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information. On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected. Off No red alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTAK09 is in loop-back mode. Off NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode. The DTI/PRI card uses a standard IPEsized (9.5" by 12.
Physical description 863 The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-channel daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 277 "NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card" (page 863). The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card LED State Definition ACT On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist, the card is not disabled, and it is not in a loopback state. Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been disabled. See the other LEDs for more information. On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected. Off No red alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTAK09 is in loop-back mode.
Physical description 865 Table 354 NTAK09 LED states during self-test Action LED State Power up system Top five LEDs light for eleven seconds. Self-test in progress Top five LEDs go out for one second. If the self-test passes, the top five LEDs flash on and off three times. If the self-test detects a partial failure, the top five LEDs flash on and off five times. When the self-test is completed, the LEDs are set to their appropriate states.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Self-tests of the NTAK93 daughterboard are invoked manually by commands in LD 96. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit, indicating the DCH is disabled. When the DCH is enabled, the LED turns green and remains steadily lit.
Functional description 867 Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used. The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card • configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps inverted. • self-test NTAK09 provides the following features and functions: • configurable parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats • AMI or B8ZS line coding • 1.
Architecture 869 • integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI) • faceplate monitor jacks for T-1 interface • configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps inverted. • self-test Architecture Signaling interface The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card • Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call. • Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is originating the call.
Architecture 871 • Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is originating the call. • T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol. • Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits and provides change of state information to the system.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan.
Architecture Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 3 4dB -10db 4 5dB 0.6db 5 6.1dB 7db 6 8dB 9db 7 -1dB 10db 8 -3dB 11db 9 -4dB 12db A idle code, 7F 3db B unassigned code, FF 14db C 1dB spare D -2dB spare E -5db spare F -6db spare 873 D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maximum, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rate from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Architecture 875 DS-1 Carrier interface Transmitter The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 358 "NTAK09 switch settings" (page 875).
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 360 "NTAK09 switch settings" (page 876).
Architecture From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network 877 The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15-position male D-type connector.
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The purpose of the clock controller interface is to provide the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard via the backplane.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 879) "Physical description" (page 880) "Functional description" (page 883) "Architecture" (page 885) Introduction The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface. This circuit card includes an on-board clock controller that can be manually switched in or out of service.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface for the CS 1000 system.
Physical description LED LBK CC 881 State Definition Off No far end alarm. On (Yellow) NTAK10 is in loop-back mode. Off NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode. On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled. On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode. Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference. Off The clock controller is switched off.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card LED Definition State On (Green) Flashing (Green) Off The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference The clock controller is switched off Note: See "Clock controller interface" (page 894) in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation. The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-layer printed circuit board.
Functional description LED State Definition Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference. Off The clock controller is switched off. 883 Note: See "Clock controller interface" (page 894) in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation. Power requirements The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V. The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane.
NTAK10 2.
Architecture • per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and far-end • self-test • download of incoming ABCD validation times from software • warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted) 885 Applicability to France Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in firmware, and are switch-accessed.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card • Card-LAN interface • carrier interface • clock controller interface The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 architecture include: • DS-30X interface • signaling interface • three microprocessors • digital pad. • Card-LAN interface. • carrier interface. • clock controller interface. A description of each block follows.
Architecture 887 Transmit data To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry. Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PROM. The PROM contains pad values, idle code, and A/µ-law conversion. They can be set independently for incoming and outgoing voice on a per channel basis.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Receive data To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the DS-30X interface, where signaling information from the signaling interface circuitry is multiplexed. To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom.
Architecture 889 • controlling LEDs • downloading LCAs • monitoring errors and alarms • detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data • counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors, and CRC-4 errors • monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment • detecting and reporting of alarm indication signals (AIS) • updating of per channel loopback registers • controlling the far-end loopback and digroup loopback functions DS-30X micro
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card The external interconnection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with a NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217. The external connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217. CEPT interface For the Conference of European Postal Communications (CEPT) interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is through the NT5K85 DTI cable assembly. It converts the 120 ohms D-connector to 75 ohms coaxial cable. The impedance is switch set.
Architecture 891 If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the NTBK05. Channel associated signaling Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carrying channel has its own signaling channel permanently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is used to transmit two types of signaling: supervisory and address. Channel associated signaling implies that each traffic carrying channel has its own signaling channel permanently associated with it.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as Denmark’s Flash signal and Sweden’s Parking signal, the minimum duration of any signal state is 100 ms. Some signal states can have a minimum duration time that is longer than 100 ms. The desired abcd bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under the control of the System Core card. The bit pattern to be transmitted is held on the line for a minimum period of time.
Architecture • 893 transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application The functions of this microprocessor include: • receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor, decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions • transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor • handling PPM • updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM • providing outpulsing • receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor • transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application The functions
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Carrier interface Tx Direction The HDB3 encoded multiplexer output is sent to the output selector, which selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around far end data. The HDB3 is converted from digital to AMI and sent to the carrier. A transformer provides isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms). The HDB3 encoded multiplexer output is fed to the output selector, which selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around far end data.
Architecture 895 ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run). The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run). See "Clocking modes" (page 906). Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking: • tracking a reference, and • locked onto a reference.
Architecture 897 When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond. If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include: • phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time may be accepted. • providing primary to secondary switchover and auto-recovery • preventing chatter • providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities • complying with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications.
Architecture 899 Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card to the secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary. If the software command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references.
Architecture 901 the clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another 2 Mbps DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating from other 2MB DTI packs are used. The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal.
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Various 2MB DTI switchable options exist on the NTAK10. These are: Switch Off (Switch Open) On (Switch Closed) S1-1 - - S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled S2-1 120 ohm 75 ohm S2-2 75 ohm 120 ohm S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware S3-2 - - Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 903) "Physical description" (page 909) "Functional description" (page 910) Introduction Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift in all parts of the network. Synchronization is accomplished with an NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard in each Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk card.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main cabinet. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.
Introduction 905 It is consequently located in slots 1 to 9 of the main and IP expansion cabinets and can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets (such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It does not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates. ATTENTION IMPORTANT! Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gateways that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.
Introduction 907 Tracking mode In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tracking mode, one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Primary Reference Source (PREF) for clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondary Reference Source (SREF). PREF and SREF are defined in LD 73.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.
Physical description 909 In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the Option 11C is used as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the Option 11C is intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software commands.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard State Definition On (Green) NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode. Flashing (Green) NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD60. If the CC is tracking this may be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions.
Functional description • 911 external timing interface The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include: • phase difference detector circuit • digital phase-lock loop • clock detection circuit • digital-to-analog converter • CPU MUX bus interface • signal conditioning drivers and buffers • sanity timer • microprocessor • CPU interface • external timing interface A description of each block follows.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements, and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance. This circuit, under firmware control, enables a phase difference measurement to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and the system clock. The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.
Functional description 913 Table 373 System clock specification and characteristics Specifications CCITT EIA Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.48 MHz Accuracy ±3 ppm ±1 ppm Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm Drift Rate (Aging) ±1 ppm per year ±4 ppm in 20 years Tuning Range (minimum) ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min. ±90 ppm max. ±15 ppm max.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Specifications CCITT EIA Tuning Range (minimum) ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min. ±90 ppm max. ±15 ppm max. 0 to 10 volts, 5V center 0 to 10 volts, 5V center Input Voltage Range EIA/CCITT compliance The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT or 2.56 Mb basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly affect PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets (2.
Functional description 915 and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover. Switchover occurs in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is out of specification.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary; however, it switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and continues to do so even if the secondary recovers.
Functional description 917 To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10 seconds is implemented. Digital to analog converter The Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) enables the microprocessor to track, hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL. The firmware uses the available memory on the clock controller to provide error-burst detection and correction.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that the free-run mode of operation automatically initiates after the clock controller has been enabled. In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover.
Functional description • 919 minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks The microprocessor does the following: • communicates with software • monitors 2 references • provides a self-test during initialization • minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks The microprocessor does the following: • communicates with software • monitors two refere
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard External timing interface The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.
Functional description Item Specification Humidity IEC 68-2-3 Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32 hardware integrity and regulatory specifications: EMI FCC part 15 sub- part J CSA C108.
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Item Specification Temperature IEC 68-2-1 IEC 68-2-2 IEC 68-2-14 Humidity IEC 68-2-3 Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 923) "Physical description" (page 924) "Functional description" (page 932) "Architecture" (page 933) Introduction The NTAK79 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH). The NTAK79 card also includes an onboard clock controller (equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock Controller) that can be manually switched into or out of service.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The NTAK79, which can be located in the main and IP expansion cabinets, provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH) for the Option 11C system. This circuit card also includes onboard circuitry equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock Controller that can be manually switched in or out of service. The NTAK79 2 MB Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH) for the CS 1000 system.
Physical description 925 LED State Definition ACT On (Green) The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. Off The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red. On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 377 NTAK79 LEDs LED State OOS On (Red) Definition The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is either disabled or out-of-service. Off ACT The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. Off RED The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red. On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected.
Physical description 927 of the Primary Rate interface (PRI). The remaining two LEDs are associated with the on-board Clock Controller and the on-board D-channel interface (DCHI). The LEDs are described in Table 377 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page 926). Table 378 NTAK79 LEDs LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service. Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active state.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card NTAK79 switches The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-board dip switches. The tables that follow provide information on the various settings and related functions of these switches. Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Physical description 929 Switch SW2 - Carrier Impedance Configuration This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms. Twisted pair cable is usually associated with 120 ohms. Coaxial cable is usually associated with the 75 ohms setting. Table 380 Switch SW2 Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2 75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On) 120 ohms Down (On) Up (Off) Switch SW3 - Clock Controller Configuration This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Figure 279 NTAK79 card with switch locations Switch SW1 - DCHI Configuration This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is not supported at this time. For all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. Table 383 Switch SW1 Switch Down (On) Up (Off) SW 1-1 enable DCHI disable DCHI SW 1-2 DPNSS1/DASS2 Q.
Physical description 931 Table 384 Switch SW2 Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2 75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On) 120 ohms Down (On) Up (Off) Switch SW3 - Clock Controller Configuration This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller. Disable the SW 3-2 if the on-board clock controller is not in use.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Environment The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications. The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications. The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications. Functional description The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions: • recovery of the 2.
Architecture • onboard D-channel interface • 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values • conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) • Card-LAN for maintenance communications 933 The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions: • recovery of the 2.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include: • DS-30X interface • A07 signaling interface • digital pad • carrier interface • CEPT transceiver • SLIP control • D-Channel support interface • 8031 microcontroller • Card-LAN / echo / test port interface A description of each block follows.
Architecture 935 The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10 message format; 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 5 5.0 dB 5 –5.0 dB 6 6.1 dB 6 –6.0 dB 7 7.0 dB 7 –7.0 dB 8 8.0 dB 8 –8.0 dB 9 9.0 dB 9 –9.0 dB 10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed.
Architecture PAD SET 0 937 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for Mu-Law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and Mu-Law.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Signaling interface The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. The Meridian 1 signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller.
Architecture 939 Table 390 Impedance matching switch selection Cable On Off 75 ohms S2 S1 120 ohms S1 S2 Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch. The line interface provides for the use of either 75ohm coaxial or 120ohm twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in the settings table below.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 393 Carrier shield grounding switch settings Switch Carrier Pair On Off S4-1 Rx shield Open GND S4-2 Tx shield Open GND NTAK79 provides for the capability of selectively grounding the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are shown below.
Architecture 941 attenuation requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz. The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card CEPT transceiver The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732. The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse. The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction.
Architecture 943 The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables for a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and D-channel on a single circuit card. The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NTAK79 faceplate to indicate enabled/disabled states. See Table 376 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page 924). The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by an on-board dip switch.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include: • Receive data output • transmit data input • receive clock output • transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks vary in bit rate between each other, as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack.
Architecture 945 The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-Channel Handler Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. The signals confirm to the EIA RS-422 standard. Connections would not be made to these pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They are available for future or special applications. The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-channel Handler Interface card is also available at the MDF connector.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Clock controller interface The clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the NTAK20 clock controller. Though several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock controller may be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be switched off. clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the NTAK20 clock controller.
Architecture 947 When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond. If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.
Architecture 949 • provide jitter filtering • make use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify clocking information The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include: • phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 MHz system clock, and distribute it to the CPU through the backplane.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, but switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary.
Architecture 951 A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources. See "Autorecovery and chatter" (page 915). Holdover and free-run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the NTAK79 references. NTAK79 has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line. Software designates the NTAK79 as a primary reference source to the clock controller.
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 953) "Physical description" (page 955) "Functional description" (page 956) Introduction The NTAK93 provides the D-channel handler interfaces required by the ISDN PRI trunk. The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is mounted on the NTAK09 1.
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is mounted on the NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card (installed in the Media Gateway) using standoff reference pins and connectors. The NTAK93 daughterboard, when mounted on the NTBK50 PRI digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50.
Physical description 955 The NTAK93 daughterboard provides the following features and functions: • D-channel interface or DPNSS interface • Special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH: — system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are downloaded from software) — incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented in the D-PORT firmware — supported message units and information elements can be service changed — translation of the CCITT message types information el
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCH LED is dual-color (red and green), with states represented as follows: Table 400 Faceplate LEDs State Definition On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled. On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily established. Off NTAK93 is not equipped. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCHI LED is dual-color (red and green).
Functional description 957 The microprocessors also handle some D-channel data processing in DCHI mode. One microprocessor handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from software to control the activities of the ports. The microprocessors also do some of D-channel data processing in DCHI mode.
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a code section of the DCH-PORT firmware. LAPD data link/asynchronous controller One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It performs the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions, error detection, and frame recognition (in HDLC). The parameters of these functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.
Functional description 959 DPNSS/DCHI Port The mode of operation of the DCH-PORT is controlled by a switch setting on the NTAK09/NTBK50. For DPNSS the switch is ON; for DCHI it is OFF. The port operates at: Data Rate Duplex Clock Interface 56kbps, 64kbps Full Internal / External RS422 The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software.
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard D-Port - SDTI/PRI interface Below is a brief description of signals.
NTBK22 MISP card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 961) "Physical description" (page 961) "Functional description" (page 962) Introduction The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is a microprocessor-controlled signaling processor that performs Data Link (Layer 2) and Network (Layer 3) processing associated with ISDN BRI and the OSI protocol.
NTBK22 MISP card Note: When configuring BRI trunks, the MISP (NTBK22) card must be co-located in the same Media Gateway as the SILC (NT6D70) and UILC (NT6D71) cards the MISP is supporting. Refer to ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration (NN43001-318) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-580) for additional information. The MISP occupies one slot in the Media Gateway.
Functional description 963 Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports 32 DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the MISP supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels. If the MISP is carrying packet data, it must dedicate one of its D-channels to communicate with the external packet handler. In this case the MISP supports only 31 DSLs.
NTBK22 MISP card • control terminal initialization and addressing • assign B-channels for switched voice and data transmission by communicating with the BRI terminal over the D-channel and allocating to it an idle B-channel with appropriate bearer capabilities • separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data to the packet handler • send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel Micro Processing Unit (MPU) The MPU coordinates and controls data transfer
Functional description 965 This interface uses shared Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) as a communication exchange center between the CPU and the MPU. Both the CPU and the MPU can access this memory over the transmit and receive channels on the bus. Information exchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with packetized messages transmitted over the CPU bus. This interface has a 16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control lines.
NTBK22 MISP card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 967) "Physical description" (page 968) "Functional description" (page 973) "Architecture" (page 975) Introduction The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface. It supports the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93 D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79 DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides support for protocols based on the MSDL platform. The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2 Mb PRI interface for the CS 1000. The NTBK50 card sups the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93 D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79 DCHI.
Physical description 969 Figure 280 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards The LEDs are described in Table 402 "NTBK50 faceplate LEDs" (page 969). Table 402 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service. Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion of self test, and exiting remote loopback. Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTBK50 2.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI). Off No yellow (remote) alarm. On (Green) 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.
Physical description 971 LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS) or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI). Off No yellow (remote) alarm. On (Green) 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI). Off No yellow (remote) alarm. On (Green) 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.
Functional description 973 Figure 281 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards Functional description NTBK50 provides the following features and components: • recovery of the 2.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card • support of National and International bits in timeslot 0 • clock controller daughterboard • D-channel interface daughterboard • downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard • 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values • conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) • Card-LAN for maintenance communication NTBK50 provides the following features and functions: • recovery of the 2.
Architecture • slip-buffering receive messages • support of National and International bits in timeslot 0 • clock controller daughterboard • D-channel interface daughterboard • downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard • 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values • conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) • Card-LAN for maintenance communications Architecture The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture are: • DS-30X interface • A07 signaling interface • digi
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card A description of each block follows. The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture are: • DS-30X interface • A07 signaling interface • digital pad • carrier interface • CEPT transceiver • SLIP control • D-channel support interface • clock controller interface • Card-LAN / echo / test port interface • 80C51FA Microcontroller DS-30X interface NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32-byte interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb.
Architecture 977 The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM. Digital PAD The software selects A-Law or µ-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for µ-Law is 7FH.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-law is 54H and for Mu-law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-law and Mu-law. As the idle code and unequipped code may be country dependent, the software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction.
Architecture 979 As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads available are illustrated in Table 407 "Digital pad values and offset allocations" (page 979). The values shown are attenuation levels (1.0dB is 1 dB of loss and –1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain). Table 407 Digital pad values and offset allocations PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB 1 1.0 dB 1 –1.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Carrier interface For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on the receive side, as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit stream. For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the line interface chip.
Architecture 981 Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch. The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in Table 410 "Impedance matching switch settings" (page 981).
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 412 Carrier Shield grounding switch settings Switch Down (On) Up (Off) SW 4 – 1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN SW 4 – 2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive coax signal. Settings are shown in the Table below. Table 413 Carrier shield grounding switch settings Switch Down (On) Up (Off) SW 4-1 Rx—FGND Rx—OPEN SW 4-2 Tx—FGND Tx—OPEN Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive coax signal.
Architecture 983 The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card The remote loopback function causes the far-end device to transmit the same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is additionally available at the far-end receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the near-end clock and receive data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is transmitted instead.
Architecture • transmit data input • receive clock output • transmit clock output 985 The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTBK50 supports a D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard. It is equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. The NTBK50 also supports a Downloadable D-Channel Handler interface (DDCH) daughterboard.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a single port which directly interfaces to the PRI motherboard. See Table 415 "Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)" (page 986). Table 415 Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1) Switch Function On Off S1-1 — — — S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard can be operated in two separate modes as defined by an on-board dip switch.
Architecture 987 The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard. A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8 bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART. The connection to the test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector.
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Functional description" (page 1003) "Physical description" (page 990) "Functional description" (page 992) "Download operation" (page 996) Introduction The NTBK51 daughterboard provides Downloadable D-channel Handler (DDCH) interfaces based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL).
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard — LAPD- software for data link layer processing — DCH interface — Layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reporting including link capacity The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions: • ISDN D-channel related protocol • Selftest • Loopback • D-channel loadware including: — management and maintenance — LAPD- software for data link layer processing — Meridian 1 DCH interface — Layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reporting including link capacity
Physical description • 991 slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09. One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The DCHI LED is a dual-color (red/green). The LED is described in Table 418 "Faceplate LED" (page 991).
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The DCHI LED is a dual-color (red/green). The LED is described in Table 420 "Faceplate LED" (page 992). Table 420 Faceplate LED State Definition On (Red) NTBK51 is disabled. On (Green) NTBK51 is enabled, but not necessarily established. Off NTBK51 is not equipped.
Functional description 993 The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following: • Microprocessors • Main memory • Shared memory • EPROM memory • Flash EPROM memory • EEPROM memory • Serial communication controller • Sanity timer • Bus timer Microprocessors One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the software to control the activities of the ports.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the software to control the activities of the ports. A high performance MPU supports the D-channel from the PRI card and other software applications running simultaneously on other ports of the DDCH card.
Functional description 995 The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on power up or reset. The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on power up or reset. Flash EPROM memory Flash EPROM provides non-volatile storage for the DDCH loadware which minimizes the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM provides an increase in system service with a reduced delay after a brown-out, and faster testing of a hardware pack after it is plugged in.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between local RAM and the communication ports.
Download operation 997 Downloading may be performed in either of two modes: background or maintenance. Before any downloading can take place, a D-channel link must be configured. The following situations may lead to software downloading: • during initialization when new software is installed • when enabling the card or application • during card reset (due to loss of software, corruption) • during a background audit Downloading is performed in background mode or maintenance mode.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard If a forced download enable command is executed in LD 96, the MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even if the base and application software is already resident on the DDCH card.
Download operation 999 After a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application software are validated by the CS 1000 CPU. The software is stored in flash EPROM on the DDCH card and does not need to be downloaded. But if the software is missing due to new installation, corruption, or loadware version mismatch, the CPU automatically downloads the base/application into the DDCH card.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1001) "Physical description" (page 1002) "Functional description" (page 1003) "Operation" (page 1003) "Electrical specifications" (page 1005) "Connector pin assignments" (page 1006) "Introduction" (page 923) "Applications" (page 1013) Introduction The NTCK16 generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog Central Office trunks.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards — Ireland • NTCK16BC generic Central Office trunk card without PPM. — Brazil — Ireland — Mexico — Tortolla — Singapore • NTCK16AD generic Central Office trunk card with PPM — Turkey • NTCK16BD generic Central Office trunk card without PPM. — Argentina — Turkey — Brazil — Chile — Indonesia — Korea — Venezuela Throughout this chapter, cards with PPM are identified by the vintage AX. Cards without PPM are referenced by the vintage BX.
Operation 1003 Functional description The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot. Both cards are exactly the same except for the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. The NTCK16AX card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM but the NTCK16BX card does not.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Loop start operation Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages. Idle state In the idle state, the ringing detector is connected across the tip and ring wires, providing a high impedance loop toward the Central Office. Call placed by Central Office The Central Office initiates a call by applying ringing between the tip and ring wires.
Electrical specifications 1005 Electrical specifications Power requirements Table 421 "NTCK16 circuit card power requirements" (page 1005) shows the power requirements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. Table 421 NTCK16 circuit card power requirements Voltage Idle Current Active current +15.0 V dc (See 1) 170 ma 330 ma -15.0 V dc (See 1) 170 ma 249 ma +8.5 V dc (See 2) 101 ma 100 ma +5.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Table 423 NTCK16 pad switching Loss Analog-to-Digital Digital-to-Analog PAD out 0 dB –3 dB PAD in +4 dB +1 dB Note: The tolerance for the above nominal values is +0.3 dB, -0.7 dB.
Configuration Figure 282 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Figure 283 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F, L, S Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Configuration Figure 284 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16AX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
Configuration Prompt Response Description BTID (See page 803.) Xx Enter the country busy tone ID: 1011 Tortola, Brazil = 10 Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO) Singapore = 11 Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Chile, Venezuela, Thailand, Korea = 06.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16BX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
Applications Prompt Response Description BTID (See 807.) Xx Enter the country busy tone ID: 1013 Tortola, Brazil = 10 Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO) Singapore = 11 Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Kuwait,Chile, Venezuela, Indonesia, Thailand,Korea = 06.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Note: PPM is available on the NTCK16AX trunk card. It is not supported on the NTCK16BX trunk card. PPM allows the user of a telephone to keep an accurate record of Central Office calls for billing or administration purposes.
Applications 1015 LD 97 - Defining Loss Switching mode. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG TYPE: SYSP IPE system parameters configuration YES Select North American transmission plan. ... NATP Note: The default to the NATP prompt is NO, and therefore this prompt must always be checked during installation. 2. Define Loss Switching Class Of Service. Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown. LD 14 - Defining Loss Switching Class Of Service.
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Call disconnect If any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS), the Loop Start Trunk is released when the disconnect signal is received. This applies also in call states such as ringing, camp-on, and DISA. There is no configuration involved for this operation. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1017) "Memory" (page 1019) "100BaseT IP daughterboards" (page 1020) "PC card interface" (page 1023) "Security device" (page 1023) "SDI ports" (page 1024) "Conferencing" (page 1025) "Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment" (page 1025) Introduction This chapter introduces the NTDK20GA Small System Controller (SSC) Card used in the Call Server, Media Gateway, a
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still supported.
Memory 1019 Figure 285 NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server Memory The majority of system and customer configured data is both controlled and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM. In the event of data loss, the NTDK20 SSC card also retains a copy of customer files in an area called the Backup flash drive. The NTDK20 SSC card is equipped with 8MB of temporary memory space called DRAM.
NTDK20 Small System Controller card processes temporary automated routines and user-programmed commands while the system is running. The DRAM on the SSC card stores operating system files, user files, overlay data, patch codes, and the active copy of the customer database. The NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash daughterboard is the NTTK25. It performs most of the system software storage and data processing. NTTK25 daughterboard The NTTK25 is a 48 MB daughterboard comprised of Flash ROM and Primary Flash drive.
100BaseT IP daughterboards 1021 An optional second NTDK83 daughterboard can be mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card in the Call Server. Adding the second NTDK83 daughterboard provides support for up to four Media Gateways. See Figure 286 "NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard" (page 1021). The NTDK99AA (single-port) daughterboard is mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card in the Media Gateway to provide connectivity to the Call Server. See Figure 287 "NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard" (page 1022).
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Figure 287 NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard Table 424 Expansion daughterboards Number of ports Daughterboard NTDK99 (used in Media Gateway) one NTDK83 (used in Call Server two Cable type Use the supplied NTTK34AA UTP CAT 5 RJ-45 2 m cross-over cable to connect the Call Server and Media Gateway using the 100BaseT daughterboards. Max. distance between Call Server and Media Gateway systems Media Gateways can be located up to 100 m (328 ft.
Security device • 1023 Use Media Conversion devices (third party converters) to convert 100BaseT to fiber for distances from 100 m to 40 km. See Figure 288 "Call Server connection to Media Gateway" (page 1023). Figure 288 Call Server connection to Media Gateway For further information or installation instructions, refer to Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310).
NTDK20 Small System Controller card dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requirement of a single keycode for each system. Refer to Figure 285 "NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server" (page 1019) for the location of the device. This security scheme provides the following: • enables the system to operate as a single system when all links are up.
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment 1025 Conferencing Thirty-two conference channels are provided by the NTDK20 SSC card’s conference devices. Conference capability can be increased by mounting expansion daughterboards on the NTDK20 SSC card. Each dual IP daughterboard increases the total number of conference channels by 32. The maximum number of conference ports is 96. Each conference device provides 32 ports of conferencing capabilities (one conference participant for each port).
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Table 426 Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion slot assignments Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion First Media Gateway Media Gateway/ Expans ion Third Second Physica l card slot Logical card slot Physica l card slot Logical card slot Physica l card slot Logical card slot Physica l card slot Logical card slot 1 11 1 21 1 31 1 41 2 12 2 22 2 32 2 42 3 13 3 23 3 33 3 43 4 14 4 24 4 34 4 44 5 * 5 * 5 * 5 * 6 *
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment Figure 290 Media Gateway Expansion slots Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1029) "Processor" (page 1032) "Ethernet ports" (page 1032) "Expansion daughterboards" (page 1032) "Backplane interface" (page 1032) "Serial data interface ports" (page 1033) "Faceplate LED display" (page 1033) Introduction The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card provides a gateway controller for MG 1000E IP Media Gateways in a CS 1000E system.
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card • 128 MB RAM. • 4MB boot flash. • Internal CompactFlash (CF) card mounted on the card. It appears to the software as a standard ATA hard drive. • Embedded Ethernet switch. • Six 100 BaseT Ethernet ports for connection to external networking equipment. • Four character LED display on the faceplate. • Two PCI Telephony Mezzanine Card form factor sites for system expansion. • Real time clock (RTC). • Backplane interface.
Introduction Figure 291 MGC block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card Processor The processor combines RISC processors, DSP resources, SDRAM controller, and UARTs. The processor runs the application as well as providing tone and conference functions. It interfaces to the rest of the system using Ethernet. Ethernet ports External connections Of the six external Ethernet ports, three are reserved for ELAN subnet connections and three for TLAN subnet connections.
Faceplate LED display 1033 Serial data interface ports The MGC has three serial data interface (SDI) ports. The ports can be used locally for debugging, or they can be configured in the CS 1000E Call Sever as system terminals. Only ports SDI 0 and SDI 1 can be used to access the installation menu during initial configuration of the MGC. SDI 2 is not available during bootup. Due to a limitation of the three port cable used, SDI 1 and SDI 2 do not use hardware flow control. Only SDI 0 has full modem support.
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card LOAD Application software is loading. LLL:S IPMG super loop and MGC shelf number. LLL is the superloop number. S is the shelf number. For example, 032:0, 120:1 Faceplate LED display In a normal boot process the diagnostic messages would be displayed in the following order: 1. BOOT 2. POST 3. PASS 4. LOAD If there is a fatal self test error during bootup, an error code appears and the PASS and LOAD messages are not displayed.
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1035) "Cabinet/chassis support" (page 1038) "Media storage" (page 1039) "Memory" (page 1039) "Ethernet interfaces" (page 1039) "Serial data interface ports" (page 1040) "USB 2.
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card The CP PM hardware includes the following components and features: • Intel Pentium processor. • Integrated Intel 855GME GMCH/Intel ICH-4 controller chipset. • Two CompactFlash sockets: (1) a fixed media disk (FMD) on the card and (2) a hot swappable removable media disk (RMD) accessible on the faceplate. • DDR RAM expandable up to 2 GB. • Three Ethernet ports. • Two serial data interface ports. • One USB port. • Security device.
Introduction Figure 292 CP PM high level hardware block diagram Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Figure 293 CP PM card Cabinet/chassis support The CP PM NTDW61 single-slot card is supported in the following chassis: • Option 11C cabinet (except for slot 0). • Option 11C expansion cabinet (except for slot 0). • Option 11C Mini chassis (except for slot 0 and slot 4). • Option 11C Mini expander chassis. • MG 1000E main chassis (except for slot 0). • MG 1000E expander chassis.
Ethernet interfaces 1039 Media storage Fixed media drive The fixed media drive (FMD) is a CompactFlash (CF) card that is internal to the CP PM card. It is accessible only when the CP PM card is removed from the system. The FMD serves as a hard drive. The Fixed Media Drive is used when CP PM is a Call Server. It is connected directly to the ATA controller in the chipset, which is also known as the hard drive controller.
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card TLAN The TLAN network interface is a 10/100 BaseT port. By default this network interface is set to autonegotiate. This network interface is used for Signaling Server applications. Serial data interface ports The CP PM has two serial data interface (SDI) ports: Port 0 and Port 1. Both ports are standard RS232 DTE ports. They are routed through the backplane of the shelf to a 50-pin main distribution frame (MDF) connector on the back of the shelf.
Faceplate 1041 Faceplate The CP PM faceplate is available in two sizes: NTDW61 single slot, and NTDW66 double slot. The CP PM card faceplate is equipped with Status, Active CPU, CF, and Ethernet LED indicators. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Figure 294 CP PM NTDW61 and NTDW66 faceplates Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
LED indicators 1043 Faceplate buttons Reset Reset (RST) generates a hard reset of the card. Init Init (INI) generates a manual initialization of the software. DIP switch The DIP switch selects the media drive. CF MASTER/POSITION1 selects the Compact Flash (CF) FMD and HD MASTER/POSITION2 selects the Hard Drive FMD. LED indicators Status LED The functionality of the Status LED is summarized in the following table.
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card Ethernet LEDs ELAN and TLAN LEDs The functionality of the ELAN and TLAN network interface LED indicators is depicted in the following figure. Figure 295 ELAN and TLAN port LED indicators HSP LEDs The functionality of the HSP port LED indicators is depicted in the following figure. Figure 296 HSP port LED indicators Removable and fixed media drive LEDs LEDs are provided to indicate the access/activity of the removable and fixed media drives.
NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1045) "Media Gateway Controller card" (page 1045) "Daughterboard configurations" (page 1047) Introduction The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card has two PCI Telephony Mezzanine Card form factor expansion sites. Daughterboards (DB) in the expansion sites provide Digital Signal Processor (DSP) resources for VoIP.
NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards Figure 297 Media Gateway Controller with daughterboards Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Media Gateway Controller card 1047 Figure 298 Daughterboard Daughterboard configurations The DBs are available in two sizes: An NTDW62 32-port daughterboard (DB-32) and an NTDW64 96-port daughterboard (DB-96). There are four possible Media Gateway configurations: • A pure TDM single Media Gateway with no DSP daughterboards or Media Cards. • A system with only Media Card. • A system with only DSP daughterboards. • A system with both DSP daughterboards and Media Cards.
NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards • A DB-32 in DB expansion site #2. • A DB-32 in DB expansion site #1 and a DB-32 in DB expansion site #2. • A DB-96 in DB expansion site #1. • A DB-96 in DB expansion site #1 and a DB-32 in DB expansion site #2. The following table summarizes the supported placement of the DBs in the MGC expansion sites and the card slots represented by each DB.
NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1049) "Ethernet ports" (page 1050) "Backplane interfaces" (page 1050) "Serial data interface ports" (page 1051) "Faceplate LED display" (page 1051) Introduction The NTDW65 MC32S Media Card provides 32 IP-TDM gateway ports between an IP device and a TDM device in a CS 1000 network. The MC32S replaces the previous media card or ITG card. The Media Card comes in an IPE form factor.
NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card • 10/100 BaseT ELAN network interface for management and signalling messages. • 10/100BaseT TLAN network interface for telephony voice traffic. • FPGA for backplane interfaces. • Two TTY ports on the processor for debugging. • 100BaseT faceplate port for debugging. Figure 299 Voice Gateway Media card block diagram Ethernet ports External connections There are TLAN and ELAN network interfaces for connection to external networks, and a faceplate debug port.
Faceplate LED display 1051 • A10 signalling. • CardLan interface. • Hardware watchdog. • Time-switch for flexible TDM timeslot mapping. Serial data interface ports The Media Card has two serial data interface ports on the master MSP. The installation menu can by accessed through either port. TTY settings The default tty settings for both ports are: • Baud rate: 9600. • Data bit length: 8. • Stop bit: 1. • Parity: none. • Flow control: none.
NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card 4. LOAD If there is a fatal self-test error during bootup, an error code appears and the PASS and LOAD message are not displayed. During normal operation after bootup, the faceplate displays Leader (L) or Follower (F) and the number of registered sets. For example, ’L027’ means Leader of 27 sets Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1053) "Physical description" (page 1055) "Functional description" (page 1063) "Software description" (page 1065) "Hardware description" (page 1065) "Architecture" (page 1067) Introduction The NTRB21 (DTI/PRI/DCH) TMDI digital trunk card is a 1.5 Mb DTI or PRI interface to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller (NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy any available slot 1-9. Note 2: On non-ECM system cabinets, the NTAK20 can be placed in slots 1-9. On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active NTAK20 must be placed in slots 1-3 (slots 4-10 cannot be used).
Physical description 1055 To provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. This card replaces the NTAK09 described in "NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card" (page 859). The TMDI feature does not affect the NTAK09 functionality. The configuration and maintenance changes to the card are not apparent to the user. Call processing is not affected. The NTRB21 card is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 300 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 432 "NTRB21 LED states" (page 1056). Table 432 NTRB21 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state.
Physical description LED YEL LBK State Definition Off No red alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode. Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode. 1057 Figure 301 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1058) shows the faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. The NTRB21 card uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multi-layer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. It is keyed to prevent insertion in slot 10.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 301 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTRB21 card, the remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Physical description 1059 In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 433 "NTRB21 LED states" (page 1059). Table 433 NTRB21 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 302 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 433 "NTRB21 LED states" (page 1059). Table 434 NTRB21 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTRB21 is not disabled.
Physical description LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected. Off No red alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. Off No yellow alarm. On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode. Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode. YEL LBK 1061 Figure 303 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1062) shows the faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 303 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Power requirements The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on –12 V. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Functional description 1063 The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on -12 V. The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on –12 V. Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card • Card-LAN for maintenance communication • loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end • echo canceler interface • integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI) • faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface • configurable D-channel data rate with 64 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps inverted • self-test NTRB21 provides the following features and functions: • configurable parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, d
Hardware description 1065 • 1.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 304 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller (NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy any available slot 1-9. Note 2: The NTRB21 TMDI card requires that the Option 11C be loaded with at least Release 24 software.
Architecture 1067 Figure 305 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1068) shows a faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card. The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or Primary Rate Interface functionality on the CS 1000. The NTRB21 has a built-in downloadable D-channel. Note: The NTRB21 can be used with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel daughterboard).
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 305 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate Interconnection The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier cable. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available. The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5Mb carrier cable (A0394216). The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is also available if required. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
Architecture 1069 The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier cable. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available. Microprocessor The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints. • Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
Architecture Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 A idle code, 7F 3db B unassigned code, FF 14db C 1dB spare D –2dB spare E –5db spare F –6db spare 1071 The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-law, A-law to µ255, and A-law to A-law.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card combinations each for Mu255 to Mu255, Mu255 to A-Law, A-Law to Mu255, and A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan. Table 437 Digital pad values and offset allocations Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 0 0dB –7db 1 2dB –8db 2 3dB –9db 3 4dB –10db 4 5dB 0.6db 5 6.
Architecture • 64 kbps clear • 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted) 1073 DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established unless the PRI loop is enabled. On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows: OFF = D-channel The ON setting for DPNSS (U.K.) is not supported at this time.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes: • 56 kbps • 64 kbps clear • 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted) DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established unless the PRI loop is enabled.
Architecture 1075 The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The Digital Signal – Level 1 (DS-1) transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to be extended from the card to the Digital Signal Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 439 "NTRB21 switch settings" (page 1075).
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network The connection to the external digital carrier is via a 15 position Male D type connector.
Architecture 1077 NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts of the network. The NTAK20 clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system.
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts of the network. On CS 1000 systems, synchronization is accomplished with the NTAK20 clock controller circuit card. The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000 to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system.
NTVQ01xx Media Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Physical description" (page 1079) "Hardware architecture" (page 1080) "Functional description" (page 1083) "Survivability" (page 1083) Physical description The Media Card replaces the ITG Pentium card and is available as an 8-port or 32-port card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway or slots 7 through 10 in the Media Gateway Expansion.
NTVQ01xx Media Card Figure 306 NTVQ01xx Media Card The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and backplane interfaces, which are used to connect external LANs. This section provides information on the faceplate connectors and indicators. Hardware architecture The Media Card comes in two versions: 8-port and 32-port. Faceplate connectors and indicators Figure 307 "NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate" (page 1082) shows the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate.
Hardware architecture 1081 PC card slot This slot accepts standard PC card flash cards, including ATA Flash cards (3 Mbit/s to 170 Mbit/s). Nortel supply PCM card adaptors which enable CompactFlash cards to be used in this slot. This slot is used for NTVQ01xx Media Card software upgrades, backing up announcements, and additional storage. Ethernet activity LEDs The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate contains Ethernet activity LEDs for each network.
NTVQ01xx Media Card Figure 307 NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate RS-232 Asynchronous Maintenance Port An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintenance port is also available through a female DB9 connector on the 50-pin I/O Adaptor. This should be used to make a permanent terminal connection. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.
Survivability 1083 Functional description Media Cards use different types of firmware pre-installed, depending on the application being supported. The Voice Gateway application enables Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) for either line or trunk applications. When the Voice Gateway application is installed on the Media Card, the card is called the Voice Gateway Media card. Other examples of applications on a Media Card include IP Line 3.0 and Integrated Recorded Announcer.
NTVQ01xx Media Card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Physical description" (page 1085) "Functional description" (page 1085) Physical description The NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium (ITG-P) card supports IP Phones by providing a communication gateway for the IP Phone between the IP data network and the system. The IP Phone uses the IP data network to communicate with the ITG-P card. You can install this card in any two consecutive IPE slots.
NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card WARNING The NWK connector looks like a 9-pin serial connector. Do not connect a serial cable or any other cable to it. If a cable is installed to the NWK connector, the TLAN interface card is disabled. ITG-P LED (Card Status) The red status faceplate LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of the 24-card ports. The LED is on (red) during the power-up or reset sequence. The LED remains lit until the card is enabled.
Functional description 1087 Figure 308 NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface. NWK Status LED NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interface card Ethernet activity: • Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is received from the TLAN interface card Ethernet hub. • Yellow – flashes when there is TLAN interface card data activity. During heavy traffic, yellow can stay continuously lit.
NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card PC card slots The ITG-P card has one faceplate PC card slot, designated drive A. The PC card slot is used for optional maintenance (backup and restore). The ITG-P card also has one unused inboard slot, designated drive B. The PC card slots support PC-based hard disks (ATA interface) or high-capacity PC flash memory cards. Maintenance Display A four character, LED-based, dot matrix display shows the maintenance status fault codes and other card state information.
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1089) "Physical description" (page 1090) "Functional description" (page 1091) "Connector pin assignments" (page 1095) "Configuring the ESDI card" (page 1097) "Applications" (page 1101) Introduction The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) card gives the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 switch two fully synchronous high-speed serial ports.
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card • NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5) • NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13) • NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8) Note: When as ESDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any I/O device connected to the card does not function when the CPU in that module is inactive. Physical description The ESDI card circuitry is contained on a 31.75 by 25.
Functional description 1091 Figure 309 CPC513 ESDI card front panel Functional description The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent, two-port synchronous serial data interface card. See Figure 310 "ESDI card block diagram" (page 1092). The two serial input/output data ports terminate on DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the card. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Each port operates independently in synchronous mode, in half or full duplex, at speeds of up to 64 kbps. Each port can be connected to either Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communications Equipment (DCE). The electrical interface for the ESDI card may be either EIA RS-232-C or a proprietary high-speed interface. The high-speed interface combines features of RS-422-A for data and timing signals with features of RS-232-C for control signals.
Functional description 1093 The characteristics of the synchronous communication ports are shown in Table 443 "Characteristics of synchronous ports" (page 1093).
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Fault detection Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardware faults on the card and link level LAPB protocol faults. It reports the faults to the CPU when predetermined thresholds (downloaded at initialization) are exceeded.
Connector pin assignments 1095 • High-speed interface: The high-speed interface combines features of the RS-422-A standard for the data and timing signals with standard RS-232-C control signals. It is used when the signal rate is greater than 19.2 kbps and/or when the distance between the system and host is greater than 15.24 m (50 ft). No modems are needed if the distance is less than 30.48 m (100 ft).
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Table 445 Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments - RS-232-C interface Signal source Pin number EIA circuit Signal functions To DCE From DCE 1 Shielded n/a n/a 7 Signal ground (SG) n/a n/a AB 2 Transmitted data (TX) 3 — BA 3 Received data (RX) — 3 BB 4 Request to send (RTS) 3 — CA 5 Clear to send (CTS) — 3 CB 6 Data set ready (DSR) — 3 CC 8 Carrier detect (CD) — 3 CF 20 Data terminal ready (DTR) 3 — CD 15 Transmitt
Configuring the ESDI card Signal source 1097 EIA circuit (lead) Pin number Signal functions To DCE From DCE Data 2 3 13 16 Transmitted data – lead A Received data – lead A Transmitted data – lead B Received data – lead B 3 — 3 — — 3 — 3 Control 4 5 6 8 20 Request to send (RTS) Clear to send (CTS) Data set ready (DSR) Carrier detect (CD) Data terminal ready (DTR) 3 — — — 3 — 3 3 3 CA CB CC CF CD Timing 12 Transmitter signal element timing (DTE) – lead B — 3 DD (B) 14 Transmitter signal
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Synchronous port address space is the same as asynchronous port address space. When selecting an address for the ESDI card, make sure that it does not conflict with an address currently being used by an asynchronous card. Table 447 "ESDI card address switch settings" (page 1098) shows the ESDI card address switch settings.
Configuring the ESDI card 1099 Figure 312 ESDI card option switch locations Table 448 ESDI card DTE/DCE mode jumper settings Port Data communication equipment (DTE) 1 UA10 UA12 Data terminal equipment (DCE) 1 UA9 UA11 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Jumper socket designations Mode Port Data communication equipment (DTE) 2 UA17 UA19 Data terminal equipment (DCE) 2 UA16 UA18 Table 449 ESDI card RS-232-C/high-speed interface jumper settings Mode Port Jumper socket designations RS-232-C interface 1 UB9 UB11 High-speed interface 1 UB10 UB12 RS-232-C interface 2 UB16 UB18 High-speed interface 2 UB17 UB19 Software service changes All of the other ESDI port operating parameters are
Applications 1101 Prompt Response Description USER xxx Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on the software being used. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details. XSM (NO) YES Port is used for the system monitor. Applications The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card is used any time that a high-speed, fully synchronous serial data communication channel is needed.
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Figure 313 QPC513 ESDI card cabling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1103) "Physical description" (page 1104) "Functional description" (page 1105) "Connector pin assignments" (page 1107) "Configuring the QSDI card" (page 1109) "Applications" (page 1113) Introduction The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card provides four RS-232-C serial ports between the system and external devices.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card • NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8) Note: When a QSDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any input/output I/O device connected to the card does not function when the CPU in that module is inactive. Physical description The QPC841 QSDI card is a printed circuit board measuring 31.75 cm by 25.4 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.). The front panel is 2.54 cm (1 in.
Functional description 1105 Figure 314 QPC841 QSDI card front panel Functional description The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four asynchronous serial ports, including the baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the system processor using memory reads and writes. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains four universal asynchronous receiver/transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 315 "QPC841 QSDI card block diagram" (page 1106). The other logic on the card consists of four baud rate generators, four RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the jumpers and logic needed to configure the UARTs.
Connector pin assignments 1107 Connector pin assignments Connector J1 is connected to port one, and uses the RS-232-C standard DB-25-pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and four, and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable (NT8D96) splits the J2 signals out to three standard RS-232-C connectors. Port 2 is connected to connector A, Port 3 is connected to connector B, and Port 4 is connected to connector C.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Table 452 Connector J2 pin assignments Pin Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode Frame ground Frame ground 1 FGD 2 TD Transmitted data Transmitted data 3 RD Received data Received data 4 RTS Request to send (not used) Request to send (Note 2) CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send 6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready 7 GND Ground Ground 8 CD Carrier detect (Note 1) Carrier detect (not Used) 20 DTR
Configuring the QSDI card Pin Number Port Signal 21 CD 22 DTR Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode Carrier detect (Note 1 Carrier detect (not used) Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)) 1109 Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card SW14 Port 1 Port 2 SW15 Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 15 off off off off off off off off Switch settings Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF. Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never use identical settings. Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON. To disable ports 3 and 4, set SW15 position 1 to ON.
Configuring the QSDI card Port 3 – SW4 1111 Port 3 – SW5 Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on Port 4 – SW2 Port 4 – SW3 Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on Test switch setting Switch SW16 is only used for factory testing;
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Figure 316 QSDI card option switch locations Software service changes Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record programLD 17. Instructions for running the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.
Applications 1113 Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 456 "LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters" (page 1113) These parameters must be configured for each port that is being used. Table 456 LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change configuration. TYPE: CFN Configuration type. IOTB YES Change input/output devices.
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card — QCAD290 Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Equipment Identification (NN43001-254) for more information — QCAD42 • SDI male-to-male round cables (external use only) — NT8D95 • SDI to I/O cables (system options use only) — NT8D82 Note: This cable is available in different lengths.
Applications Figure 317 QPC841 QSDI card cabling Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
The TDS/DTR card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1117) "Features" (page 1117) Introduction The TDS/DTR card function was incorporated into the NTDK20 SSC. However, it is still supported on the system. The TDS/DTR functionality is also incorporated into the NTDK97 MSC card used with Chassis system. The TDS/DTR is not required in a 2 chassis Chassis system. You can install this card in slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet.
The TDS/DTR card Tone detector The TDS/DTR card provides eight channels of DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) detection in A-Law or µ-Law. In North America, pre-programmed data is configured for µ-Law tone detection. SDI function The TDS/DTR card provides two SDI (Serial Data Interface) ports. Refer to "SDI ports" in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering (NN43021-220) for more information.
Features Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 19 770/1340 -12/-10 5 20 770/1480 -12/-10 6 21 850/1210 -12/-10 7 22 850/1340 -12/-10 8 23 850/1480 -12/-10 9 24 940/1340 -12/-10 0 25 940/1210 -12/-10 * 26 940/1480 -12/-10 # 27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo 28 770/1630 -12/-10 F 29 850/1630 -12/-10 I 30* reserved 31 reserved 32* reserved 33 400 -19 ÷ 34 [400 x (120@85%)] -19 ÷ 35 940/1630 -17/-15 P 36 700/1210 -17/-15 1 37
The TDS/DTR card dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) 51* reserved 52* reserved 53 1300/1500 -13/-13 0 54 700/900 -13/-13 1 55 700/1100 -13/-13 2/CC 56 900/1100 -13/-13 3 57 700/1300 -13/-13 4 58 900/1300 -13/-13 5 59 1100/1300 -13/-13 6 60 700/1500 -13/-13 7 61 900/1500 -13/-13 8 62 1100/1500 -13/-13 9 63 700/1700 -13/-13 ST3P/RB/ C11 64 900/1700 -13/-13 STP/C12 65 1100/1700 -13/-13 KP/CR/KP1 66 1300/1700 -13/-13
Features dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) 83* reserved 84 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 85 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 86 400 -17 ÷ 87 1400 -26 ÷ 88 950 -12 ÷ 89 1400 -12 ÷ 90 1800 -12 ÷ 91 470 0 ÷ 92 940 0 ÷ 93 1300 0 ÷ 94 1500 0 ÷ 95 1880 0 ÷ 96 350/440 -10/-10 97* TBD 98* TBD 99* TBD 100* TBD 101 600 -19 ÷ 102 800 -19 ÷ 103 1400 -23 ÷ 104 820 -7 DTMF Digits 1121 MF Digits Note: Tones #1 - 16 (inclusive) and #234
The TDS/DTR card Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 3 700 X 1340 -14/-13 2 4 700 X 1480 -14/-13 3 5 770 X 1210 -14/-13 4 6 770 X 1340 -14/-13 5 7 770 X 1480 -14/-13 6 8 850 X 1210 -14/-13 7 9 850 X 1340 -14/-13 8 10 850 X 1480 -14/-13 9 11 940 X 1340 -14/-13 0 12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 * 13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 # 14 700 X 1630 -14/-13 F0 15 770 X 1630 -14/-13 F 16 850 X 1630 -14/-13 I 17 1400 -37 89 940/1630 -13/-1
Features Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 106 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 107 1400 -26 ÷ 108 440 -23 ÷ 109 420 -9 ÷ 110 950 -12 ÷ 111 1400 -12 ÷ 112 1800 -12 ÷ 113 940/1630 -12/-10 P 114 700/1210 -12/-10 1 115 700/1340 -12/-10 2 116 700/1480 -12/-10 3 117 770/1210 -12/-10 4 118 770/1340 -12/-10 5 119 770/1480 -12/-10 6 120 850/1210 -12/-10 7 121 850/1340 -12/-10 8 122 850/1480 -12/-10 9 123 940/1340 -12/-10 0 1
The TDS/DTR card Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 139 700/1210 -18/-17 1 140 700/1340 -18/-17 2 141 700/1480 -18/-17 3 142 770/1210 -18/-17 4 143 770/1340 -18/-17 5 144 770/1480 -18/-17 6 145 850/1210 -18/-17 7 146 850/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 8 147 850/1480 -18/-17 ÷ 9 148 940/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 0 149 940/1210 -18/-17 ÷ * 150 940/1480 -18/-17 ÷ # 151 700/1630 -18/-17 F0 152 770/1630 -18/-17 F 153 850/1630 -18/-17 I
Features Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 171 820 -7 P 172 850 -8 1 173 420 -32 2 174* reserved 175 420 -6 4 176 420 -2 5 177 1020 -13 6 178 1800 -17 7 179 1400 -23 8 180 950 -29 9 181 1400 -29 0 182 1800 -29 * 183 950 -22 # 184 470 0 F0 185 940 0 F 186 1880 0 I 187 400 -22 188 420 X 25 -17 189 950 -16 190 950 -25 191 940/1630 -9/-7 192 700/1210 -9/-7 193 700/1340 -9/-7 194 700/1480 -9/-7
The TDS/DTR card Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 204 700/1630 -9/-7 205 770/1630 -9/-7 206 850/1630 -9/-7 207 420 -10 208 420 -8 209 420 -4 210 1400 -18 211 1400 -9 212 350/420 -9/-9 213 420 -14 214 450 -12 215 450 -22 216 820 -16 217 350/420 -14/-14 218 940/1630 -14/-12 219 700/1210 -14/-12 220 700/1340 -14/-12 221 700/1480 -14/-12 222 770/1210 -14/-12 223 770/1340 -14/-12 224 770/1480 -14/-12 225 850/
Features Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload DTMF Digits 236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2 237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3 238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4 239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5 240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6 241 850 X 1210 -17/-15 7 1127 MF Digits Note: Tones marked with * are not supported by IP sets and therefore should not be selected in any system that has IP sets. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.
The TDS/DTR card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference NN43001-311 01.04 Standard Release 5.0 23 May 2008 Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks .
Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents This section contains information on the following topics: "Introduction" (page 1129) "Operation" (page 1129) "Frame structure" (page 1130) "LAPB balanced class of procedure" (page 1131) "Commands and responses" (page 1131) "Description of procedure" (page 1132) Introduction This chapter describes the LAPB Data Link Control protocol used with the QPC513 ESDI card.
Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol Frame structure All transmissions are in frames and each frame conforms to the format shown in Table 459 "LAPB frame structure" (page 1130). In particular, frame elements for applications using a port on the QPC513 follow these LAPB conventions: • Zero information field is permitted. • Inter-frame time fill is accomplished by transmitting contiguous flags. This is compatible with AT&T Technical Requirement BX.25 and ADCCP standards.
Commands and responses 1131 LAPB balanced class of procedure Applications which use ports on the QPC513 are automatically designated as BAC, 2, 8 (for example, balanced operation, asynchronous balanced mode class of procedure with optional functions 2 and 8 implemented).
Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol Command Response RNR RNR REJ REJ or FRMR SABM UA DISC DM Option 2 Legend: I: Information RR: Receive ready RNR: Receive not ready REJ: Reject SABM: Set asynchronous balanced mode DISC: Disconnect RSET: Reset FRMR: Frame reject UA: Unnumbered acknowledge DM: Disconnect mode Option 2: Provides ability for more timely reporting of I frame sequence errors Option 8: Limits the procedure to allow I frames to be commands only Description of procedure Th
Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Reference Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved. Publication: NN43001-311 Document status: Standard Document version: 01.04 Document date: 23 May 2008 To provide feedback or report a problem with this document, go to http://www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.
